Yamaha PSR S550 Owner's Manual Psrs550 En Om C1

User Manual: Yamaha PSR-S550 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 142

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

DIGITAL WORKSTATION

Owner’s Manual
EN

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).
DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other
than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically
recommended by Yamaha.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery
case rupture.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

Warning:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the
time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units.

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that
could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods
of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult
an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.

Disposal Notice:

NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,
state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist
you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date
of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a
permanent record of your purchase.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Model

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping
with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of
the following:

Serial No.
Purchase Date

Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of
battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP (bottom)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact
Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også
selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)

This product contains a high intensity lamp
that contains a small amount of mercury.
Disposal of this material may be regulated
due to environmental considerations.
For disposal information in the United States, refer to
the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:
www.eiae.org
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(class B)

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : PSR-S550/S550B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

(mercury)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
BLUE
: NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal
of the three pin plug.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble
Music (U.K.) Ltd.

(2 wires)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/AC power adaptor

Water warning

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Use the specified adaptor (page 135) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in
damage to the instrument or overheating.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects
on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll
anything over it.

Do not open

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have
the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.

If you notice any abnormality

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/AC power adaptor
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord.
• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.

Location
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or
rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the
internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.

(3)-12

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

1/2

Connections

Saving data

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Saving and backing up your data
• The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory
when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the
Registration Memory (page 85).
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save
important data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer
(page 98).

Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

Backing up the USB storage device/external media

Handling caution

• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument or headphones for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long
time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on
your instrument.
● Trademarks
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• Windows is the registered trademarks of Microsoft® Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

(3)-12

2/2
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it
has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI
files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use
is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE
ILLEGAL COPIES.
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited
except for your personal use.

Logos
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to
provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to
ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

XF
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and
open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played.

STYLE FILE
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with
peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-S550!
Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument
in order to take full advantage of its various features.
Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you
finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand
an operation or function.

Accessories
The instrument package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.
•
•
•
•

Music rest
Accessory CD-ROM
Owner’s manual (this book)
AC Power Adaptor (May not be included depending on your particular area.
Please check with your Yamaha dealer.)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Special Features of the PSR-S550
■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices

Page 17

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be
changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of Voices. You
can change the mood of a Song written for piano, for example, by using
violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

■ Play Along with Styles

Page 23

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment
Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing
band covering wide variety of Styles from waltzes to 8-beat to samba …
and much more. What’s more, you can create and save your own original
Styles for even greater versatility.

■ Save and Recall Panel Settings to Registration Memory
This convenient function lets you save a ‘snapshot’ of your custom panel
settings—up to 64 complete “Registrations.” These can be called up
instantly any time you need them—perfect for making broad sound/effect
changes when playing live!

Page 77

8 banks x 8 presets = 64 Registrations

■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display

Page 30

When you play back a Song, the corresponding score will be shown on the
display as the Song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If
the Song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also
appear on the score display.
* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the Song you are using with the score display function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.

■ Save and Load Data to USB Flash Memory or Computer
These data organization tools let you store your original User Songs or custom panel settings (Registration Memory) to a USB Flash Memory device
or a computer, then load the data back to the instrument as needed.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Pages 83 and 94

Contents
Logos........................................................................................ 6
Accessories .............................................................................. 7
Special Features of the PSR-S550 .......................................... 8

Setting Up

Power Requirements .............................................................. 10
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) ............. 10
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)............................. 10
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)............................ 11
Turning the Power On ............................................................ 11
Changing the Display language ............................................. 12
Adjusting the LCD CONTRAST control .................................. 12

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel ............................................................................. 14
Rear Panel ............................................................................. 15

Quick Guide
Playing Songs
Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices

16
17

Select and Play a Voice ......................................................... 17
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL.......................... 18
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
—LEFT .............................................................................. 19
Playing Drum Kits ................................................................... 21

Playing Styles

Select a Styles Rhythm .......................................................... 22
Playing Along with a Style ...................................................... 23
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 25

Playing with the Music Database

Using Songs

Selecting and Listening to a Song .......................................... 27
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 28
Types of Songs ...................................................................... 29
Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 30
Displaying the Lyrics............................................................... 31

Recording Your Own Performance

Track Configuration ................................................................ 32
Quick Recording Procedure ................................................... 33
Multi-track Recording Procedure ............................................ 34
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ......................................... 37
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track From a User Song . 38

Backup and Initialization

Backup ................................................................................... 39
Initialization............................................................................. 39

Basic Operation and Displays

Basic Operation ...................................................................... 40
The Displays........................................................................... 42
MAIN Display Items ................................................................ 43

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Pattern Variation (sections) .................................................... 55
One Touch Setting.................................................................. 58
Variation Change and OTS (OTS LINK)................................. 58
Setting the Split Point ............................................................. 59
Playing a Style with Chords but without Rhythm
(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 60
Adjusting the Style Volume..................................................... 60
Chord Basics .......................................................................... 61
User Style ............................................................................... 63
Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard .............................. 63

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

Style Structure ........................................................................ 64
Main Display of the Style Creator ........................................... 64
Follow the Style Creator instructions. ..................................... 65
Basic Operation ...................................................................... 66
Parameter Settings, Recording and Saving ........................... 67

Song Settings

Song Volume .......................................................................... 72
Changing the Tempo .............................................................. 72
A-B Repeat ............................................................................. 73
Muting Independent Song Parts ............................................. 74

MIXER

Mixer Display .......................................................................... 75
Basic operation ....................................................................... 75
Track ON/OFF and other parameter controls ......................... 76

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................ 77
Recalling a Registration Memory............................................ 78
Registration Clear—Deleting a Specified Registration
Memory.............................................................................. 79

The Functions

Selecting and Setting Functions ............................................. 80

Using USB Flash Memory

Using USB Flash Memory ...................................................... 83
Formatting USB Flash Memory .............................................. 84
Saving the Registration Data .................................................. 85
Saving a User Song or User Style .......................................... 86
Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or
MDB Files .......................................................................... 87
Deleting Data from USB Flash Memory ................................. 88
Playing Songs or Styles Saved to USB Flash Memory .......... 89

Connections

Connectors ............................................................................. 90
Connection to a USB Storage Device .................................... 90
Connecting a Personal Computer .......................................... 92
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ....... 94
Initial Send .............................................................................. 95
Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument ..... 96

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Important Notices about the CD-ROM.................................... 99
Contents of the CD-ROM ..................................................... 100
Software Installation ............................................................. 101

Reference
Playing with the Effects

Adding Harmony..................................................................... 44
Changing the Reverb Type .................................................... 45
Changing the Chorus Type .................................................... 46
Panel Sustain ......................................................................... 47
Adding DSP ............................................................................ 47
Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 48

Using Various Functions

Playing with the metronome ................................................... 49
Using Tap Start ...................................................................... 51
Touch Response .................................................................... 51
EQ settings ............................................................................. 52
Pitch Controls ......................................................................... 53
Changing the pitch of the instrument in octaves .................... 54

Appendix
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 107
Messages ............................................................................ 108
Voice List .............................................................................. 110
Drum Kit List ......................................................................... 116
Style List ............................................................................... 121
Music Database List ............................................................. 122
Voice Effect Type List ........................................................... 125
MIDI Implementation Chart................................................... 132
MIDI Data Format ................................................................. 134
Specifications ....................................................................... 135
Index ..................................................................................... 136

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up
Be sure to do the following operations
BEFORE turning on the power.

Power Requirements

Make all necessary connections below
BEFORE turning the power on.

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the
instrument is set to STANDBY.
• Use the specified adaptor (page 135) only. The use of other
adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor
and the instrument.

Connect the power adaptor’s DC plug to the power
supply jack.
Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
CAUTION
• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,
or during electrical storms.

The instrument speakers are automatically shut off
when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/
OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You
can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard
amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other
line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output
signal to that device.
• Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be
damaging to your hearing.

CAUTION

AC outlet

• To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external
devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to
observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment
damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain
as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha
FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch
sustain on and off.
NOTE
• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this
changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed
footswitch operation.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)

Turning the Power On
Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch again to turn the power OFF.

Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance
data and Song files between the two (page 96). To use
the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following:
• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making
the connections, turn the instrument’s power on.
• Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer from
CD-ROM (see page 101).
• Install the MusicSoft downloader on your computer from the website (see page 103)

Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data
exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are
restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is
turned on.
CAUTION
• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is
still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are
not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the
AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

CAUTION
• Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing..” message is
shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and
result in a loss of data.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Changing the Display language

Adjusting the LCD CONTRAST control

This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to Japanese the
lyrics, file names and some messages will be displayed
in Japanese where appropriate.

Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the rear panel
of the instrument for optimum display legibility.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

CAUTION
• Looking at the display for a long period of time in the dark may
cause eyestrain or damage to your eyesight. Make sure to use the
instrument with as much ambient light as possible and also take
adequate breaks and rest from use.

Press the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons a number

of times until the “Language” item appears.
The currently selected display language will appear
below the “Language” item.

Language item

The currently
selected language

Select a display language.

The [+] button selects English and the [-] button
selects Japanese.
The language selection will be stored in the internal
flash memory so that it is retained even when the
power is turned off.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN dis-

play.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

● Music Rest
Insert the music rest
into the slots as
shown.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

e
q

r
y

i
u

!2
!4

!3
!7

!0
#3
#2

Front Panel
q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 16
w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 16, 40
e [DEMO] button ................................. page 16
r [SONG MODE] button ..................... page 27
t SONG
[PRESET], [USER] buttons .......... page 27
[SCORE] button ............................ page 30
[LYRICS] button ............................ page 31
y [USB] button .................................... page 27
u [REC] button .................................... page 33
i STYLE............................................... page 22
o STYLE CONTROL
[OTS LINK] button ........................ page 58
[AUTO FILL IN] button .................. page 55
[ACMP] button .............................. page 23
INTRO [I]–[III] buttons .................. page 55
MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons
..................................................... page 55
ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons .......... page 55
[SYNC STOP] button .................... page 57
[SYNC START] button .......... pages 23, 56
[START/STOP] button........... pages 22, 41
14

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

!0 SONG CONTROL
[r] button.................................... page 28
[f] button .................................... page 28
[A B] button .............................. page 73
[ ] button..................................... page 28
[>/■] button...........................pages 28, 41
!1 TRANSPOSE [+] and [-] buttons .... page 53
!2 [METRONOME] button.................... page 49
!3 [TAP TEMPO] button ....................... page 51
!4 TEMPO [+] and [-] buttons.............. page 49
!5 [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button ..... page 74
!6 [MEMORY] button ........................... page 77
!7 REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons.. page 77
!8 Style Part/Song Part [1/9]–[8/16]/
REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8]
buttons............................................. page 77
!9 Display ......................................pages 12, 42
@0 [EXIT] button ................................... page 42
@1 Dial ................................................... page 41
@2 [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons............. page 41

Panel Controls and Terminals

@4 @5
@0

@9
@7
#0

Rear Panel
#4

Rear Panel
@3 CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons ..... page 41

#4 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 10

@4 [EXECUTE] button........................... page 68

#5 USB TO HOST and TO DEVICE
terminals .......................................... page 90

@5 [MDB] button ................................... page 26
@6 [FILE MENU] button ........................ page 83
@7 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 80
@8 ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4]
buttons ............................................. page 58

#6 CONTRAST knob ............................ page 12
#7 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 10
#8 DC IN 16V jack................................. page 10

@9 VOICE ............................................... page 17
#0 VOICE CONTROL
[LEFT] button ................................ page 19
[DUAL] button ............................... page 18
[HARMONY] button ...................... page 44
[TOUCH] button ............................ page 51
[SUSTAIN] button ......................... page 47
[DSP] button.................................. page 47
#1 UPPER OCTAVE [+] and [-] buttons
.......................................................... page 54
#2 [PITCH BEND] wheel....................... page 48
#3 Drum Kit ........................................... page 21

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

e
d

ck Gui
ui
Q

Playing Songs
Quick Guide

This instrument include a Demonstration Song. Let’s start by playing
the Demonstration Song.

Press the [STANDBY/ON] button until it locks in the ON
position.
The Main display appears in the LCD.

VOICE name
STYLE name
SONG name
Music Database name

Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demo.

>/■] button to stop Demo.
Press the [>

The Demo display appears in the LCD.
Gradually raise the [MASTER VOLUME] control while playing the
instrument to set the desired listening level.
The Demo Song will restart when playback reaches the end.

Operation automatically returns to the Main display.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

NOTE
• The [DEMO] button doesn’t
function when the Demo Cancel
function is set to enable. (See
page 82.)

e
d

ck Gui
ui
Q

Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,
this instrument has a large range of realistic Voices—including guitar,
bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects, and a
wide variety of other musical sounds.

Select and Play a Voice
In this operation, you’ll select a Main Voice and play it on the keyboard.

Select and press the desired Voice category button in the
Voice section.
The Main Voice selection display will appear.
The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be
highlighted.
For this example, select the “Flute&Woodwind” category.

NOTE
• To change the Voice category,
press another category button.

MAIN VOICE
selection display
CATEGORY
name

Current
selected Voice

Select the Voice you want to play.

Play the keyboard.

Look at the highlighted Voice name and rotate the dial. The available
Voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The Voice selected
here becomes the Main Voice.
For this example, select the “010 Flute” Voice.

Try selecting and playing a variety of Voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL
This lets you select a second Voice which you can play in addition to the Main Voice.
The second Voice is known as the “Dual” Voice.

Two Voices will sound at the same time.

Press the [DUAL] button.
The [DUAL] button turns the Dual Voice on or off.
When Dual Voice is turned on, the [DUAL] button is lit.
The currently selected Dual Voice will sound in addition to the Main
Voice when you play the keyboard.

[DUAL] button is lit

Press and hold the [DUAL] button for longer than a second.
The Dual Voice selection display appears.
The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be
highlighted.
Dual Voice selection display

The currently selected category

The currently selected Dual Voice
Hold for longer
than a second

Select and press the desired Voice category button in the
Voice section.
For this example, select the “Percussion” category.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices

Select the Voice you want to play.

Play the keyboard.

Look at the highlighted Voice name and rotate the dial. The available
Voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The Voice selected
here becomes the Dual Voice.
For this example, select the “003 Marimba” Voice.

Try selecting and playing a range of Dual Voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—LEFT
In the Left mode you can play different Voices from the keys to the left and right of the keyboard “split
point.” The Main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the Voice played to the
left of the split point is the Left Voice. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 59).
Split point

Left Voice

Main Voice and Dual Voice

Press the [LEFT] button.
The [LEFT] button turns the left Voice on or off. The currently selected
Left Voice will sound when you play keys to the left of the keyboard
split point.

[LEFT] button is lit

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices

Press and hold the [LEFT] button for longer than a second.
The LEFT Voice selection display will appear.
The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be
highlighted.
Left Voice selection display

The currently selected category

The currently selected Left Voice
Hold for longer
than a second

Select and press the desired Voice category button in the
VOICE section.
For this example, select the “Guitar&Bass” category.

Select the Voice you want to play.

Play the keyboard.

Look at the highlighted Voice name and rotate the dial. The available
Voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The Voice selected
here becomes the Left Voice.
For this example, select the “041 FolkGuitar” Voice.

Try playing the selected Left Voice.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
20

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices

Playing Drum Kits
Drum Kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal
instrument—as a Main Voice, for example—all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different
pitches. If you select a Drum Kit as the Main Voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different
drum or percussion instrument.

Press the [DRUM KIT] button.

Rotate the dial and select the Drum Kit you want to play
(001–019).

The “Drum Kit” category appears.

Drum Kits List
Voice
No.

Voice
No.

Drum Kit name

Voice
No.

Drum Kit name

Voice
No.

Drum Kit name

001

Standard Kit1

006

Room Kit

011

Symphony Kit

016

Arabic Mixture Kit

002

Standard Kit2

007

Rock Kit

012

Cuban Kit

017

Indian Kit

003

Hit Kit

008

Electro Kit

013

PopLatin Kit

018

Chinese Kit

019

Chinese Mixture Kit

004

Jazz Kit

009

Analog Kit

014

Arabic Kit

005

Brush Kit

010

Dance Kit

015

Arabic Kit2
NOTE

Play each key and enjoy the Drum Kit.

• See the Drum Kit List on page
116.

A good Drum Kit to start out with is 001, Standard Kit 1.

ui
ca
Tr Mut
ia
ng e
l
Sh e M
u
ak
er te

Sh
o
la
ve rt
s

ui
ro

lo
se
at
d
Pe
i-H
da
l
at
O
pe
n
C
ra
sh
C
R
ym
id
e
ba
C
ym l 1
ba
Ta
l1
m
bo
u
C
ow rine
be
ll
Vi
br
as
la
p
Bo
ng
o
L
C
on
ga
H
O
pe
Ti
m
n
ba
le
Ag
L
og
o
L
M
ar
ac
as
H

i-H

at
C

la
p

i-H
H

ick
H

an
d

im
de
Si

pe
n
O

ick
St

as
ta
C

ap
Sl

Ta
p

h
us

us
Br

Sh
ot

Example: 001 Standard Kit 1

lic
k

H
S
Ta wir
l
p
Sn Sw
ar irl
e
Sn R
ar oll
e
S
Ki oft
ck
S
Ki
o
ck ft
Ti
gh
t
Ki
ck
Sn Sn
ar are
e
Fl
T
oo igh
rT t
om
Fl
oo
rT L
om
Lo H
w
M To
id m
T
M om
id
L
To
C
H mH
hi
ig
n
h
R ese To
id
C m
e
C ym
y
Sp mb bal
la al C
C sh C up
ra
sh ym
ba
C
y
R
id mb l
e
a
C
ym l 2
ba
l2
B
C
on ong
ga o
H H
M
C ute
on
Ti ga
m
L
ba
l
Ag e H
og
o
Sa
C H
m
ba ab
Sa W asa
h
m
ba istl
W eH
h
G istle
W uiro L
oo L
d on
W Blo g
oo ck
d
B H
C loc
ui
ca k L
Tr
O
ia
ng pe
n
le
O
Ji
ng pen
le
B
Be ells
ll T
re
e

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

e
d

ck Gui
ui
Q

Playing Styles
This instrument includes an auto-accompaniment feature that plays
appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment) when you
play left-hand chords.
You can select from 176 different Styles covering a range of musical
genres and time signatures (see page 121 for a complete list of the available Styles). You can also select from the original Styles you’ve created
on your own. Here’s how you can use the auto-accompaniment feature.

Select a Styles Rhythm
Most Styles include a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues,
samba, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played
using percussion instruments only.

Select and press the desired Style category button in the
Style section.
The Style selection display appears.
The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be
highlighted.
Style selection display

The currently
selected category

The currently
selected Style

Your created Styles are stored to the [USER] button.

Select the Style you want to play.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Look at the highlighted Style name and rotate the dial. The available
Styles will be selected and displayed in sequence.
See the Style list on page 121.

The Style rhythm will start playing.
To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing Styles

Playing Along with a Style
You learned how to select a Style rhythm on the preceding page.
Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with.

Select and press the desired Style category button in the
Style section.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.
Press the [ACMP] button.
Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment
off.

[ACMP] button is lit.
NOTE

● When automatic accompaniment is on ...
The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54: F#2) becomes the
“auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the
accompaniment chords.

• The Split point can be changed
as required; refer to page 59.

Split point (54: F#2)

Auto accompaniment region

Turn Sync Start on.
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the Sync Start function on.

Flashes when Sync Start is on.

When Sync Start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a
Style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard
split point. To cancel or disable Sync Start, press the button a second
time to turn the Sync Start function off.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing Styles

Play a left-hand chord to start the Style.
You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.
This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.
The chord will change according to the left-hand notes you play.
Split point

Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody
with your right hand.
Split point

Auto accompaniment region

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop Style playback
when you’re done.

You can switch Style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.
Refer to “Pattern Variation (sections)” on page 55.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing Styles

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords
There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:
● Easy Chords
● Standard Chords
The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types.
The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range.” Play the
accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard.
Split point (default: 54/F#2)

Root notes and the
corresponding keys

Db Eb

F# G# Bb

Db Eb

C D E F GA B C D E F

Accompaniment range

■Easy Chords

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you easily play chords in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard using only
one, two, or three fingers.

■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you produce accompaniment by
playing chords using normal fingerings in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard.
● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]

C add9

C M7

( 9)

(b5)

)

C M7

(

)

• To play a minor chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest black key to the left of it.

(#11)

(9)

(

)

• To play a major chord
Press the root note of the chord.

C M7

C sus4

C aug

C M7aug

C m add9

C m6

C m7

C mM7

(

)

• To play a seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white key to the left of it.

(

)

(9 )

(11)

C m7

(9)

(b5)

C m7

C mM7

)

(9)

)

(#9)

)

(

C 7sus4

(b5)

)

(

(13)

(

C 7aug

(b13)

(b9)

(

(#11)

C dim7

C dim

(

(b5)

(

)
(

)

(

)

C m7

(

• To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white and black keys to the
left of it (three keys altogether).

)

C m7

C sus2

* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords
will be recognized without them.

● Multi Fingering and Full Keyboard
These let you select the accompaniment section of the keyboard for chord playing. (See the “Chord Fingering” section
in the Function Setting List on page 81.)
Multi Fingering: As explained above, the keys to the left of the split point (default: 54, F#2) become the
accompaniment range. This method lets you play the accompaniment chords in the specified area of the
keyboard, and is set as the default for the instrument.
Full Keyboard: This lets you play the accompaniment chords freely from anywhere on the keyboard.
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

e
d

ck Gui
ui
Q

Playing with the Music Database
You want to play music in your favorite Style, but you’re not sure how to
select the best Voice and Style for the type of music you want to play, simply select the appropriate Style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds
and Style!

Press the [MDB] button.

Select the desired Music Database which matches the
music style or type you want to play.

Play the chords with your left hand and the melody with
your right.

The music database selection display will appear.
The currently selected category name, MDB number and name will be
highlighted.

Press [ < ], [ > ] category button when changing the MDB category.
Referring to the Music Database List on page 122 of the manual, use the
dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the music style
of the Song you intend to play.
For this example select “315 BigKissForDream” in the Swing category.

The swing Style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to
the left of the split point (page 23). Refer to page 25 for information
about playing chords.
Split Point

You can check the assigned Voice and Style at this point by pressing the
[EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

4
26

>/■] button to stop playback.
Press the [>

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

e
d

ck Gui
ui
Q

Using Songs
With this instrument the term “Song” refers the data that makes
up a piece of music.
In this section we’ll learn how to select and play Songs.

Song

(Score)

Listen

(Lyrics)

See

Record

Selecting and Listening to a Song

Select and press one of the Song category buttons, which
corresponds to the type of Song you want to listen to.
[PRESET] : Nine preset Songs are available here.
[USER] : This contains your recorded Songs and Songs loaded from
USB flash memory/computer.
[USB]
: This contains USB Songs when a USB flash memory
device is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
The file name in USB flash memory can be shown as long
as you’ve saved the data to the root directory or the next
two levels (see page 91).
The Song selection display will appear.
The currently selected Song number and name will be highlighted.

NOTE
• When the instrument is in the
Song mode, the [SONG MODE]
button is lit. When Style mode is
enabled, the button is not lit.

Song Selection
display

Currently
selected Song

Select a Song.
Use the dial to select the Song you want to listen to.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Songs

PRESET

Built-in Songs
1 Amazing Grace (Traditional)
2 OdeToJoy (L.v. Beethoven)
3 Annie Laurie (Traditional)
4 Nocturne 9-2 (Chopin)
5 Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns)
6 Latin (Original)
7 Arabic (Original)
8 Bhangra (Original)
9 Wu Lin Hun (Original)

USER

User Songs (Songs you record yourself) or Songs transferred from a USB
flash memory/computer (pages 96–98)

USB

Songs in a USB flash memory connected to the instrument (pages 87, 89)

Listen to the Song.
Press the [>/■] button to begin playback of the selected Song.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [>/■] button again.

NOTE
• Some of the preset songs have
been edited for length or
arrangement, and may not be
exactly the same as the original.

Song start

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause
These are just like the transport controls on a CD player, letting you fast forward [f], rewind [r], and
pause [ ] playback of the Song.

REW

PAUSE

Press the fast reverse
button to rapidly return
to an earlier point in
the Song.

Press the fast forward
button to rapidly skip
ahead to a later point
in the Song.

Press the pause
button to pause
playback.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Songs

Types of Songs
The following four types of Songs can be used by this instrument.
●
●
●
●

Preset Songs (the nine Songs built into the instrument).............. Preset Song numbers 001–009.
User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ................... USER Song numbers 001–005.
Loaded Songs (Song data loaded from computer) ...................... USER Song numbers 006–
USB Songs (Song data in the USB flash memory) ...................... Song numbers

The chart below shows the basic operation flow for using the preset Songs, user Songs, loaded Songs and
USB Song from storage to playback.

Computer

Your own performance

USB flash memory

Song

Connect USB TO HOST
terminal and Transfer
(page 96)

Record
(page 32)

Connect USB TO DEVICE
terminal and Save/Load
(page 90)

Song Storage location.

Preset Songs
(001–009)

User Songs
(001–005)

The nine Songs
built into the
instrument.

Song

User Songs
(loaded Songs)
(006–)
Song

USB Songs

Song

Load
Save/Load

PRESET

USER

USB

Play

NOTE
• Different internal memory areas are used to store user Songs and loaded Song files
transferred from a computer. User Songs cannot be directly transferred to the loaded
Song area of the internal memory, and vice versa.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Songs

Displaying the Song Score
This instrument is capable of display the scores (notation) of Songs.
Scores can also be displayed for Songs loaded from USB flash memory or computer.

1
2

Select a Song.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 27.

Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will
appear.
There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff.
These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed.
Single-staff
Marker

NOTE
• Both chords and lyrics will be
shown in single-staff score display of a Song that includes
chord and lyric data.
• When there are many lyrics in a
Song, they may be displayed in
two rows a measure.

Melody score

• Some lyrics or chords may be
abbreviated if the selected Song
has a lot of lyrics.

Chord

• Small notes that are hard to
read may be easier to read after
you use the quantize function
(page 82).

Lyrics

Double-staff
NOTE
• No lyrics are shown in doublestaff display.

>/■] button.
Press the [>

To return to the MAIN display, press the [EXIT] button.

The Song will begin playing. The triangular cursor will move across the
top of the score to indicate the current location.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Songs

Displaying the Lyrics
If a Song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display.
No lyrics will be displayed for a Song that contains no lyric data, even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed.

Select a Song.

Press the [LYRICS] button.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 27.
Try to select the Preset SONG 001 or 003.

NOTE

The title, lyricist, and composer of the Song will appear on the display.

• Songs downloaded from the
Internet or commercially available Song files, including XF format files (page 6), are
compatible with the lyrics display features as long as they are
standard MIDI file format files
containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with
some files.

NOTE
• If the lyrics display shows garbled characters, try changing
the display language (page 12).

Song title, Lyricist, Composer

>/■] button.
Press the [>
The Song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the
display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the
Song.

Lyrics and Chord

■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display
Song No.

Song Name

001

Amazing Grace

003

Annie Laurie

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

e
d

ck Gui
ui
Q

Recording Your Own Performance
You can record up to five of your own performances and save them as
user Songs 001 through 005.
Additionally, when a Song is playing the score will be shown on the display. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the Song contains
lyric and chord data, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score
display.

■ Recordable data
When Style is off, tracks [1]–[16] can be recorded as melody tracks.
When Style is on, tracks [1]–[8] can be recorded as melody tracks, and tracks
[9]–[16] can be recorded as accompaniment tracks.

NOTE
• Up to approximately 30,000
notes can be recorded, if you
record only to the melody
tracks.

■ Recording methods
● Quick Recording.............. Immediately start recording by pressing the
[REC] button. (see page 33)
● Multi Recording............... Specify the Song or Part number and then
start recording. (see page 34)

Track Configuration
Generally, Song data consists of 16 tracks. On this instrument, you can record your performance step-bystep to each of tracks 1–16. For example, you can select the Main Voice for recording to Track 1, then set
the Dual Voice to Track 2, and so on. (When the Quick Recording mode is selected, the playing parts and
their corresponding tracks are set automatically.)
■ Recording track
When Multi track recording is selected and accompaniment is off, you can
specify the recording track [1]–[16] for melody, or when accompaniment is
on, you can specify the tracks [1]–[8] for melody and [9]–[16] for accompaniment. The track button in [1/9]–[8/16] that has recorded data in the tracks is
indicated in green, while the button that contains no data is unlit. Also the
track numbers containing recorded data are indicated with framed rectangles
in the display.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Own Performance

■ Example: Part settings in Multi Recording
When Style is OFF

When Style is ON

Melody or other parts: 1–16 Track

Track
1

Main
Voice
part

Track
8

Left
Voice
part

Track
9

Melody or other parts

Track
16

Other parts

Track
1

Main
Voice
part

Track
8

Left
Voice
part

Style tracks

Track
9

Other
parts

Track
16

Style

Quick Recording Procedure
You can easily start recording your performance by simply pressing the [REC] button in the [SONG] mode.
In this case, the track number and part number of tracks are set automatically.

Press the [REC] button.

NOTE

The User Song number for recording will be selected automatically.
Performance parts are as follow:
Tracks [9]–[16] will be set to recording ready mode automatically.

• You can manually select the
recorded user Song number if
you select it before pressing the
[REC] button.
• Change the Style or Tempo if
necessary.

REC ready

Track 1

Main Voice part

Track 2

Left Voice part

Track 3

Dual Voice part

Tracks 9–16

Accompaniment part

Make sure to turn the Dual Voice or Left Voice on when recording the
Dual Voice or Left Voice.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Own Performance

Recording will start when you play the keyboard.
Current measure number

Start
recording

>/■] or [REC] button.
Stop recording by pressing the [>
Track numbers containing recorded data are indicated with framed rectangles.

>/■] button to play back the recording.
Press the [>

Multi-track Recording Procedure
You can set the recorded user Song number and the parts for tracks individually.

From the MAIN display press the [USER] button, then use
the dial to select the user Song number (001–005) you
want to record to.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Own Performance

Press the [EXIT] button, then select the recording part for
each track (Part Assign).
◆ Selecting the part for the Melody track
When Style is OFF: You can select the track for recording from [1]–
[16].
When changing the track function between [TR 1–8] and [TR 9–16],
press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button repeatedly until the desired
item appears at the top on the display.

CAUTION
• If you record your performance to a track that contains previous data, the
previous data will be overwritten by the new data.

NOTE
• When ACMP track is set to REC
ON, the accompaniment will be
automatically set to ON.
• ACMP ON/OFF does not
change while recording is in
progress.
• An assigned part cannot be
specified to another track.
• A maximum of three melody
tracks can be recorded simultaneously.

While holding down the [REC] button, press one of the track buttons
[1/9]–[8/16] until the desired part is shown at the track button. Each
time you press the button, the part is changed in order (e.g., MAIN,
DUAL, LEFT) in the Main display.
When Style is ON: [TR 1–8] can only be selected for the Melody
tracks.

Press and hold

Track 1 is set to the MAIN part.

◆ Selecting the part for the Accompaniment track
While holding down the [REC] button, press the [ACMP] button. The
REC indication will be highlighted in the display and operation will be
set to record ready mode.

NOTE
• If you want to cancel the record
ready mode of a track, simultaneously hold down the [REC]
button and press again the track
button you want to cancel.

Press and hold
ACMP is set to record ready mode.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Own Performance

Recording will start when you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the [ >/■] button.
When recording is started, the display automatically returns to the Main
display, and the measure number is shown in the Main display.
Current measure number

Start
recording

Stop recording by pressing the [>/■] or [REC] button.

Alternately, if you press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons while
recording the ACMP track, an appropriate ending pattern will play and
then recording will stop. When recording stops, the current measure
number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display
will be shown in a box border.
A message prompting you to confirm saving of the data will appear.

Save the recorded Song.
Press the [+/YES] button.
■ To Record Other Tracks.
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.
You can listen to the previously recorded tracks by pressing the appropriate [1/
9]–[8/16] buttons while recording. Previously recorded track numbers are
shown in a box border.
You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear
in the display) while recording new tracks (page 74).
■ Redo the Recording
Simply select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way.
The newly recorded material will overwrite the previous data.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

NOTE
• When Song memory is full, a
corresponding message is
shown in the display and recording will be stopped. In this case,
delete any unnecessary Song
data by using Song clear or
track clear then start recording
again. (See page 37.)

Recording Your Own Performance

After the recording is completed:
◆ Play the User Song
The operation is the same as that for Preset Songs (see page 27).
1 Press the [USER] button.
2 The current Song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial
to select the user Song (001 to 005) you want to play.
3 Press the [>/■] button.

◆ Save to USB flash Memory (see page 86)
● Data not to be recorded
The following data is recorded before the beginning of the Song. Even if you
change the data while recording is in progress, the data will not be recorded.
Style number, Style volume, Time signature

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs
This function clears an entire user Song (all tracks).

1
2

NOTE

From the MAIN display, select the user Song (001 to 005)
you want to clear.

• If you want to clear a single,
specified track, refer to the Track
Clear operation on page 38.

Press and hold the TRACK [8] button for longer than a second while holding the TRACK [1] button.

Hold for longer than a second

Press and hold

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song.

NOTE

The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the Song is being cleared.

• To execute the Song Clear function press the [+/YES] button.
Press [-/NO] to cancel the Song
Clear operation.

Songs can also be cleared in the following way.
1 Confirm that USB memory is not inserted on the instrument, then press
the [FILE MENU] button.
2 Rotate the dial and select a Song.
3 Press the [EXECUTE] button.
A confirmation message will appear in the display.
4 Press [+/YES] button to clear the Song.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Own Performance

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track From a User Song
This function lets you delete a specified track from a User Song.

1
2

From the MAIN display select the User Song (001 to 005)
you want to clear, then press the [EXIT] button.
Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button a number of
times until the desired item appears on the display.
The item changes in order from “REGIST.” to “TR 1–8” to “TR 9–16”.
Select the desired track: “TR 1–8” or “TR 9–16”.

Press and hold one of the track buttons ([1/9] to [8/16])
corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer
than a second.

Hold for longer than a second.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the track.

NOTE

The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the track is being cleared.

• To execute the Track Clear function press the [+/YES] button.
Press [-/NO] to cancel the Track
Clear operation.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Backup and Initialization
Backup
The following data items are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the
power off. To recall the default settings and data, use the Initialization operation.
● Backup data
• Registration memory
• Auto Fill In On/Off
• Following parameters in the Function display:
Tuning, Split point, Touch ON/OFF, Touch sensitivity, Style volume, Song volume,
Metronome volume, Demo cancel, Language, Master EQ type, Chord fingering, SUSTAIN
ON/OFF, TG mode

Initialization
This function erases all User Songs, User Styles, User MDB, and backup data in the instrument’s internal
memory and restores the initial default settings and data.
The following initialization procedures are provided.

■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear backup data in the internal memory, simultaneously hold the
highest white key on the keyboard and turn the power on by pressing the
[STANDBY/ON] switch. The backed up data will be erased and the
default values restored.

■MEMORY Clear

NOTE
• Language settings for the instrument cannot be changed in this
operation. If you want to change
the language, use the Function
settings.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear the User Song data, User Style data or User MDB data that has
been transferred to the internal memory from a computer, simultaneously hold the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys and then turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/
ON] switch.

CAUTION
• When you execute the Clear
operation, User Song, User
Style or User MDB you have
purchased will also be
cleared. Be sure to save any
important data to a computer.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation and Displays
Basic Operation
Overall PSR-S550 control is based on the following simple operations.

1 Use the category buttons to select a basic function or a CATEGORY.
2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
3 Starting/stopping a Song or Style.

USB

Song
category

Style
category

● Volume Adjustment
Adjusts the volume of the
sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of
headphones plugged into
the PHONES jack.

Rotate counterclockwise
to lower the
volume.

Display
(pages 42, 43)

Voice
category

Rotate clockwise to
increase the
volume.

1 Use category buttons to select a CATEGORY.
● Song category
Select the Song category you want to play
● USB
Select the Song, or Style in the USB memory.
● Style category
Select the Style category you want to play

● Voice category
Select the Voice category you want to play
* If you want to change the category, press another category button or use the Category [ < ], [ > ] button.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation and Displays

● Category buttons [ <], [ >]
You can change the category after
you’ve selected a Song, Style or
Voice category.
Pressing these buttons allow you to
step in sequence through the categories.

Example: Voice selection display

Previous category

Next category

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
When you select the category such as Song, Style or Voice, the selected category name and item is
shown on the display. The item can be changed by using the dial or the [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons.

Currently selected category name

Currently selected item

● Dial
Rotate the dial clockwise to
increase the value of the
selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease its
value. Rotate the dial to continuously increase or decrease
the value.

Decrease

Increase

● [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons
Press the [+/YES] button
briefly to increment the value
by 1, or press the [-/NO] button
briefly to decrement the value
by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment
or decrement the value in the
corresponding direction.

Press
briefly to
increment.
Press
briefly to
decrement.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual, the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or
values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons.

3 Starting/stopping a Song or Style.
Press the [START/STOP] button after selecting the Song category or Style category to start playback of the selected Song or
Style (rhythm).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation and Displays

The Displays
● Display names
The display provides important, easy-to-understand indications for performing all operations.
The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.
You can see the “MAIN” indication at the top on the display.
● MAIN Display
Title

Call up the Main display
Most basic operations are carried out from the
instrument’s MAIN display.
You can return to the MAIN display from any other
display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower
right corner of the display panel.

● FUNCTION display (page 80)
The FUNCTION display provides access to 51 utility functions. The FUNCTION display appears when the
[FUNCTION] button is pressed.
In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons (page 41) to select 51 different function items.
Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can
then use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.

Function item

Value

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation and Displays

MAIN Display Items
The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: Song, Style, Voice.
It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

Transpose
(page 53)

Measure number
(page 36)

OCTAVE
(page 54)

REGISTRATION memory /
Song track indication
Shows currently selected item:
REGIST., TR 1–8, TR 9–16
(page 74)

Tempo
(page 49, 51)

A-B Repeat
Appears when the Repeat
function is on for Song playback. (page 73)

USB status
(page 83)

Chord Display
(page 25)

Registration memory
bank status
(page 77)

Song track status
(page 74)

Main Voice (page 17)
Dual Voice (page 18)
Left Voice (page 19)
Style (page 22)
Song (page 27)
Music Database (page 26)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Reference

erenc
ef
R

Playing with the Effects

Adding Harmony
This feature adds Harmony, Tremolo or Echo effects to the Main Voice.

1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn

the Harmony function on.
The [HARMONY] button lights indicating that
Harmony is on.
To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY]
button again.

3 Use the dial to select a Harmony type.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 125 for
information about the available Harmony
types.
Try playing the keyboard with the Harmony
function. The effect and operation of each Harmony type is different—for details, refer to the
section below “How to sound each Harmony
Type” as well as the Effect Type List.

NOTE
• When you press the [HARMONY] button to turn this feature on, the
appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is
automatically selected.

2 Press and hold the [HARMONY] button
for longer than a second.
The currently selected Harmony type will be
displayed.

NOTE
• The Harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to
Dual or Left Voices.
• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no Harmony
notes when the Auto Accompaniment is on (ACMP ON lights).
• When chord fingering is set to Full Keyboard, the Harmony function
is turned off automatically.

Hold for longer
than a second

Currently selected
Harmony type.

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony types 19 to 22 (Tremolo)

• Harmony types 01 to 14

Keep holding down the keys.
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the
Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard when the
Auto Accompaniment is on (page 23).

• Harmony types 23 to 26 (Trill)

• Harmony types 15 to 18 (Echo)
Hold down two keys.

Keep holding down the keys.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in
the Function Settings (page 82).

Playing with the Effects

Changing the Reverb Type
Reverb enhances the sound of the Voices with the rich ambience of a concert hall.
When you select a Style or Song the optimum reverb type for the Voice used is automatically selected. If
you want to select a different reverb type, use the operation described below.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.

3 Use the dial to select a Reverb Type.
You can check the sound of the selected Reverb
Type by playing the keyboard.

2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call
up Reverb Type.
The currently selected Reverb Type will be displayed.
Selected Reverb Type

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 126 for
information about the available Reverb Types.

Reverb Type

● Adjusting the Reverb Level

You can individually adjust the amount of reverb
that is applied to the Main, Dual, and Left Voices.
(See page 81).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing with the Effects

Changing the Chorus Type
The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same Voices being played in unison.
When you select a Style or Song the optimum Chorus Type for the Voice used is automatically selected. If
you want to select a different Chorus Type, use the procedure described below.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.

3 Use the dial to select a Chorus Type.
You can check the sound of the selected Chorus
Type by playing the keyboard.

2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call
up Chorus Type.
The currently selected Chorus Type will be displayed.

Selected Chorus Type

Chorus Type

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 127 for
information about the available Chorus Types.
● Adjusting the Chorus Level

You can individually adjust the amount of Chorus
that is applied to the Main, Dual, and Left Voices.
(See page 81).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing with the Effects

Panel Sustain
This function adds sustain to the keyboard Voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the Voices at all
times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect the Left Voice.
Press the [SUSTAIN] button to turn the
sustain function on.
The [SUSTAIN] button lights indicating that
Sustain is on.

NOTE
• For certain Voices, the sustain effect may not be obvious or audible,
even when the panel sustain function is turned on.

Adding DSP
A total of 178 DSP effects can be added to the Main, Dual and Left Voices. These range from reverb-like
ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it.
DSP Type

NOTE
• DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor and it uses a
micro processor to change the audio in various ways.

1 Use the [DSP] button to turn the DSP

function on.
The [DSP] button lights indicating that DSP is on.
To turn DSP off, press the [DSP] button again.

Hold for longer
than a second

3 Use the dial to select a DSP type.
Refer to the DSP Type List on page 128 for
information about the available DSP types.
[DSP] button lights
when DSP is on.
NOTE
• When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice
is automatically selected.
• The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning
DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change differs depending on the selected Voice.
• The DSP type is an overall setting—only one type can be selected.
For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for
example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected.
This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which
replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phenomenon occurs when you use the [f], [r] buttons or A-B
Repeat function during Song playback.

2 Press and hold the [DSP] button for

longer than a second.
The currently selected DSP type will be displayed.

Currently selected DSP type.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing with the Effects

Pitch Bend
The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll
the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a Voice
such as the “042 Overdrive” guitar Voice (page 17), you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending
effects.
You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 81.

NOTE
• Pitch Bend is not applied to the Left Voice when accompaniment is
turned on.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

erenc
ef
R

Using Various Functions

Playing with the metronome
This instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo
that is most comfortable for you.

■Turn the metronome on● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Press the [METRONOME] button to start
the metronome.
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.

Tempo

Time
Signature

2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to
280.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main
display.
Beat number
NOTE
• The tempo can be changed by either pressing the TEMPO [+]/[-]
buttons repeatedly or holding them down.

■Mute the bell

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

You can mute the Metronome bell which sounds at
the first beat of each measure.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
■Set the metronome tempo

● ● ● ● ●

1 Press the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons to call
up the tempo setting and use the buttons to raise or lower the tempo.

2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call
up “Bell.”

Tempo value

3 Rotate the dial and select ON (sound) or
OFF (mute).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Various Functions

■Changing the Time Signature ● ● ●
In this example we’ll set up a 3/8 time signature.

1 Press and hold the [METRONOME] button for longer than a second.
The currently selected time signature is displayed.

4 Use the dial to select a beat length.
Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8,
or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or
16th note). For this example, select 8. The time
signature should now be set to 3/8.

Hold for longer
than a second

Press the [METRONOME] button to confirm
the settings.

Number of beats
per measure

Note value (the note value
or length of one beat)

2 Use the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.
When the Bell setting is on, the Bell will sound
on the first beat of each measure, while a metronome “click” will sound on all others. You
can set the time signature from 01 to 60. Select
3 for this example.
NOTE
• When playing the Song or Style the beat value cannot be changed,
since the beat is synchronized to the selected Song or Style.

■Adjusting the Metronome Volume

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call
up Metronome Volume.

3 Press the CATEGORY [>] button once to
call up the Time Signature Denominator
display.

Metronome volume

3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Various Functions

Using Tap Start
You can also set the tempo by simply tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button at the required tempo—four times
for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3.
You can change the tempo during Song or Style playback by pressing the button just twice.

Touch Response
■Turning Touch Response on/off ● ●
Keyboard Touch Response can be turned on by
pressing the [TOUCH] button.
When Touch Response is on you can control the
volume of notes according to how hard you play
the keys.
The [TOUCH] button lights indicating Touch
Response is turned on.
To turn Touch Response off, press the [TOUCH]
button again.
When Touch Response is off, the same volume will
be produced no matter how hard or soft you play
the keys.

■Adjusting the Touch Response
Sensitivity ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The sensitivity of the keyboard’s Touch Response
can be adjusted in three steps (1–3). The higher the
number, the greater the volume variation produced
by the variation in how hard you play the keys—
i.e., the keyboard becomes more “sensitive.”

1 Press and hold the [TOUCH] button for
longer than a second.

Touch Sensitivity

[TOUCH] button lights
indicating when Touch
Response is turned on.

2 Use the dial to select a Touch Sensitiv-

ity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume
variation in response to keyboard
dynamics—i.e., greater sensitivity.
NOTE
• The initial default setting is 2.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Various Functions

EQ settings
Five pre-programmed EQ settings are available. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s
built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers or when connecting to an external mixer.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.

2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call
up Master EQ Type.

The currently selected EQ type will appear.

3 Use the dial to select an EQ Setting for
the best sound.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Various Functions

Pitch Controls
◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)
The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted
up or down by a maximum of one octave in semitone increments.

◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)
The overall tuning of the instrument can be shifted
up or down by a maximum of 1 semitone. The
default setting is 440 Hz.

1 Press one of the TRANSPOSE [+]/[-]

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

buttons.
The value is shown in the display, indicating
the amount of transposition over or below the
normal value.

2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call
up Tuning.

Current value

2 Use the dial to set the transpose value
between -12 and +12 as required.

Tuning

The range is 415.3–466.2 Hz

3 Use the dial to set the tuning value

between 415.3–466.2Hz as required.

NOTE
• This setting does not affect Drum Kit Voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main
display.
Pressing the TRANSPOSE [+]/[-] buttons
allows single-step changes. Pressing and holding either TRANSPOSE [+]/[-] button continuously increases or decreases the value.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using Various Functions

Changing the pitch of the instrument in octaves
You can change the playing pitch of the Main and Dual Voices in octave intervals.

1 Press the UPPER OCTAVE [+] button to

raise the pitch by one octave.
The newly changed value is shown in the LCD.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main
display.

● In the case of UPPER OCTAVE +1

2 Press the UPPER OCTAVE [-] button to

lower the pitch by one octave.
The newly changed value—now one octave
lower—is shown in the LCD.
Press the UPPER OCTAVE [-] button again to
lower the pitch one more octave.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main
display.

One octave up

● In the case of UPPER OCTAVE -1

NOTE
• When a Drum Kit is selected, each percussion Voice assigned to the
keyboard are shifted in location but not pitch.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

One octave down

erenc
ef
R

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (Auto Accompaniment) feature is described on page 22 of
the Quick Guide.
Included here is information on how you can play the Styles in various ways, how to
adjust the Style volume, how you can play chords using the Styles, and more.

Pattern Variation (sections)
The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the
accompaniment to match the Song you are playing.

Fill-in

Intro

Main variation

Ending

●INTRO section
This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on
the selected Style.
●MAIN VARIATION section
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern,
and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are four variations
on the basic pattern (A–D), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on
the chords you play with your left hand.
●ENDING section
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the Auto Accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the
selected Style.
●AUTO Fill-in section
This is automatically added before the current section changes to a newly selected section.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

1 Select the desired Style. (See page 22.)
2 Press the [ACMP] button to turn Auto

5 Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]–
[D] buttons.
The selected Main Variation button flashes.

Accompaniment on.

The [ACMP] button
lights when ACMP
is turned on.

Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to turn
the Auto Fill In function on.
The initial default setting for Auto Fill In is
“on.”

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
Synchro Start on.

6 Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons.
The selected Intro button lights.

7 Play a chord in the accompaniment

range and start the Intro section.
Try playing a C major chord. (See “Playing
Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 25.)
Split Point

The [SYNC START] button
flashes indicating Synchro
Start is engaged.

● Synchro Start
When Synchro Start is on you, can start the
Style by playing any key in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Auto Accompaniment range
NOTE
• The Baroque Air Style in the MOVIE & SHOW category does not have a
Rhythm part, so there is no rhythm sound for this Style.

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

8 Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]–
[D] buttons.

● Synchro Stop

When this function is selected, the accompaniment Style will only play while you are
playing chords in the accompaniment range
of the keyboard.
Style playback will stop when you release the
keys. To turn the function on, press the
[SYNC STOP] button.
When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly
into the selected Main section A–D.

9 Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons.

This switches to the Ending section.
When the Ending is finished, the Auto Accompaniment stops automatically.
You can have the Ending gradually slow down
(ritardando) by pressing one of the ENDING/
rit. [I]–[III] buttons again while the Ending is
playing back.

The Style will play while
you are playing the keys
Style playback will stop
when you release the keys

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

One Touch Setting
Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting
feature automatically selects four ideally matched Voices for the Style you’ve selected.

1 Select the desired Style. (See page 22.)
2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING
[1]–[4] buttons.

3 Play the chord in the accompaniment

range and start the Style.
Try selecting other ONE TOUCH SETTING
[1]–[4] buttons and listen to the results.
Split Point

Auto Accompaniment range

Variation Change and OTS (OTS LINK)
When change the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] to other MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] during OTS LINK is
on, OTS 1–4 automatically change the number according to the selected variation number. (see below)
Press the [OTS LINK] button to turn on
the OTS link.

Automatically
change

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Setting the Split Point
The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the
procedure described below.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the dial to set the Split Point to any
key from 036 (C1) through 096 (C6).
Split Point (54: F#2)

Left Voice

Main Voice

NOTE
• Changing the Split Point here also changes the Auto Accompaniment
Split Point.

2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons

• The Left Voice sounds when the split-point key is played.

as many times as necessary to call up
Split Point.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Playing a Style with Chords but without Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)
When Auto Accompaniment is on (ACMP button lights) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in
the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the Style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is called “Stop Accompaniment,” and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the
instrument can be used (page 25).
Select a Style, then press the [ACMP] button to turn Auto Accompaniment on.

[ACMP] button lights

Auto Accompaniment range

Adjusting the Style Volume
If the instrument is in the Song mode,
press one of the Style category buttons to
enter the Style mode. (page 22)

2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
as many times as necessary to call up
Style Volume.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the dial to set the Style Volume
between 000 and 127.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Chord Basics
Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.
The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the
root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major
triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third
note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale).
3rd

Root

3rd

In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the
chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes.
The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.
Major third–four half steps (semitones)

Minor third–three half steps (semitones)

The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the
triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce
two additional chords, as shown below.
Major chord
CM

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Minor chord
Cm

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Augmented chord
C aug

Major 3rd

Diminished chord
C dim

Minor 3rd

The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to
create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for
example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).
● Reading Chord Names

Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a
chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what
the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished
chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or
tensions it uses ... all at a glance.

Cm
Root note

Chord type

● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-S550.)
Suspended 4 th

Perfect 5 th

Perfect 4 th

Minor/major 7 th

Flatted 7 th

Minor chord

Major chord

7 th, flatted 5 th

Flatted 7 th

7 th chord

Minor chord

Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th
(b5)

C m7

Flatted 5 th

Major 7 th

C m7

(b5)

C mM7

Major 7 th

Minor 7 th

7 th

C sus4

Flatted 5 th

Minor 7 th chord

C M7

Major 7 th

Major chord

7 th, suspended 4 th

C 7sus4

Flatted 7 th

Suspended
4 th chord

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.
Chord Name/[Abbreviation]

Normal Voicing

Chord (C)

Major [M]

1-3-5

Add ninth [(9)]

1-2-3-5

Sixth [6]

1 - (3) - 5 - 6

Display
C

(9)

Cadd9
C6

(9)

Sixth ninth [6(9)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6

C 69

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7

C M7

CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)]
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]
Flatted fifth [(b5)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
1 - 3 - b5

(9)

C M79

(#11)

CM7#11

(b5)

Cb5

(b5)

C M7

C M7
C

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5]

1 - 3 - b5 - 7

C M7

CM7b5

Suspended fourth [sus4]

1-4-5

C sus4

Csus4

Augmented [aug]

1 - 3 - #5

C aug

Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug]

1 - (3) - #5 - 7

C M7aug

CM7aug

Minor [m]

1 - b3 - 5

(9)

Minor add ninth [m(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - 5

Cm add9

Minor sixth [m6]

1 - b3 - 5 - 6

C m6

Cm6

Minor seventh [m7]

1 - b3 - (5) - b7

C m7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7

C m7

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)]

1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)

C m7

(11)

Cm711

Minor major seventh [mM7]

1 - b3 - (5) - 7

C mM7

CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)]
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5]

1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7
1 - b3 - b5 - b7

(9)

C mM7
(b5)

C m7

Cm7
Cm79

CmM79
Cm7b5

C mM7
C dim

CmM7b5

C dim7

Cdim7

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)]

1 - b3 - b5 - 6
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)]

1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5]

1 - b3 - b5 - 7

Diminished [dim]

1 - b3 - b5

Diminished seventh [dim7]
Seventh [7]

Seventh ninth [7(9)]
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7

(b5)

Cdim

(b9)

C7b9

(b13)

C7b13

(9)

C79

(#11)

C7#11

(13)

C713

(#9)

C7
C7
C7

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)]

1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7

C7#9

Seventh flatted fifth [7b5]

1 - 3 - b5 - b7

C 7b5

C7b5

Seventh augmented [7aug]

1 - 3 - #5 - b7

C 7aug

C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

1 - 4 - 5 - b7

C 7sus4

C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2]

1-2-5

C sus2

Csus2

NOTE
• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.
• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root.
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root
and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

User Style
This instrument features 11 internal Style categories, but it also allows you to import additional Styles
(only those with an “.sty” extension) that you’ve downloaded from the Internet or gotten from other
sources, and load them into a User Style and use them in the same way as the internal Styles.
For details on loading a Style file, see “Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files ”
on page 87.

In order to load a Style file it is necessary to first either transfer the Style file to the instrument from a computer, or connect a USB flash memory containing the Style file to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Refer to
“Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument” on page 96 for details on the file transfer procedure.
If you are using a USB flash memory device, refer to “Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or
MDB Files” on page 87.
You can directly play the User Style in the USB memory without loading (page 89).

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard
In “Playing Along with a Style” on page 23 we described two methods of playing Styles (Multi, Full Keyboard) in which chords were either detected only to the left of the keyboard Split Point or over the entire
keyboard. By making the settings described below, chord detection for Style accompaniment occurs over
the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic Style performance. In this mode only
chords played in the normal way (page 25) can be detected.

1 Press the [ACMP] button for longer than
a second.

2 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.

Hold for longer
than a second

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

erenc
ef
R

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

This instrument has a Style Creator feature that lets you record and save your own
original Styles.
Recorded Styles can be played in the same manner as the preset Styles.

Style Structure
Style data consists of eighteen sections, each of which has eight separate Parts.
FILL IN A–D
INTRO 1–3

MAIN A–D

ENDING 1–3

8 Parts in each
section

Part 1
x8

Sections: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN A–D,
ENDING 1–3

Main Display of the Style Creator
The following display appears when entering the Style Creator function.
Specified measure and
beat

Currently selected function
by category [< ]/[ > ] buttons
When playing or recording, the
current measure number
appears

Current tempo

Current section

For example, set the beat number
by using the dial

Current selected section and
selected Part in the section.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

Follow the Style Creator instructions.
Select a preset Style which is most similar to the Style you want to record.
* If you are creating a Style from scratch, this step is not necessary.

Enter the Style Creator.
* A confirmation message appears asking if you want to create a Style from scratch.

Entire settings
• Beat: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4
* If you want to change the beat settings, you should clear all the previous data.

Section settings
• Section: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN A–D, ENDING 1–3.
• Measure Length: 1–32

Part Settings
• Recording Part: RHY 1–2, BASS, CHD 1–2, PAD, PHR 1–2
• Voice: Select the recording Voice.
• Part Volume: Determines the Part volume.
• Pan: Determines the pan position.
• Reverb level
• Chorus level

Recording the Part
• Recording start/stop
• Clear the recorded drum Voice

Record another Part
Editing
• Quantize: 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32
• Part clear

Saving
• Save the Style data

Record another section
Exit from the Style Creator

* Press the [EXIT] button whenever you want to exit from the Style Creator (except during recording).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

Basic Operation
1 Press one of the [STYLE CATEGORY]

A confirmation message appears.

buttons.
Select a [STYLE CATEGORY] button which is
most similar to the Style you want to create.

4 Select the production manner of Style
2 Select a Style which is most similar to

the Style you want to create.
You can also select a Style from the User
Styles.
If you are creating a Style from scratch, go on
to the next step.

Creator.
If you are creating a Style from scratch, press
the [YES] button.
If you are creating a Style by using a specified
Style (step 2), press the [NO] button.

5 Set the desired measures and beats,

and then record the Style for each Part
and for each section.

6 Save the recorded Style data to a User
Style.

3 Press [REC] and enter the Style Creator
operation.

7 Press [EXIT] to exit from the Style Creator.

● Adjust individual track volumes before recording.

NOTE
• If there is not enough capacity left on the instrument to save the
data, an appropriate message will appear in the display. Erase
unwanted data from the instrument to make more memory available.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

You can use the mixer function (page 75) to adjust
individual track volumes before proceeding with
step 3.

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

Parameter Settings, Recording and Saving
Select the production manner of Style Creator (refer steps 1–4 on page 66) and go on to the next instructions.

■Entire settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Beat
If you change the Beat value, you will need to clear
all data and then make a new Style from scratch.

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Beat” appears in the display.

■Section Settings: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Select a section

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Section” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial or directly press the [SECTION] button in the STYLE CONTROL area
to select a recorded section.

Settings: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN
A–D, ENDING 1–3

Rotate the dial and select the Beat number.

Range: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Beat.

When you create a Style based on another
Style, the following message appears.

NOTE
• You can also select the FILL IN A–D section by pressing the [AUTO
FILL IN] button and then select FILL IN A–D by using the dial.

If you want to clear the Style and make a new
one, press the [+/YES] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the section.

Measure Length

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Length” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial and select the Measure
Length.

Range: 1–32
NOTE
• If you set a length smaller than that of the previous one, any data
existing beyond the new length will be deleted.

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Measure Length.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

■Part Settings:● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Select a Part

1
2

■Recording a Part
Part buttons indication

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Part” appears in the display.
Rotate the dial and select a recorded Part.

Range: RHYTHM 1–2, BASS, CHORD 1–2,
PAD, PHRASE 1–2

Unlit, does not contain data or is
a non-playing Part (mute)
Lit in Green, contains data and selected
as playing Part
Lit in Red, recorded Part

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Part.

Select a Voice

1
2
3

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Voice” appears in the display.
Press a desired [VOICE CATEGORY] button
to select the Voice category.
Rotate the dial to select a Voice.

Range: When RHY 1 is selected as the Part, all
Voices can be selected.
When RHY 2 is selected as the Part,
drum Voices can be selected.
When other Part is selected, all Voices
excepting drums can be selected.
Part Volume

1
2

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Part Volume” appears in the display.
Rotate the dial and set the Part Volume.

Rhythm Part recording
Confirm that desired section name appears at the
upper right area in the display, and then follow the
instructions below.

Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button
and press a [RHY 1] or [RHY 2] button in the
rhythm Part.

“RHYTHM1” or “RHYTHM2” appears in the
display.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A REC mark appears at the recorded Part on
the display. In this condition, the [PART] button also changes to red.

Range: 0–127
Pan

1
2

Current measure number

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Pan” appears in the display.
Rotate the dial and set the Pan position.

Range: 0–64–127
Reverb Level

1
2

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Reverb Level” appears in the display.
Rotate the dial and set the Reverb depth.

Range: 0–127
Chorus Level

1
2

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Chorus Level” appears in the
display.
Rotate the dial and set the Chorus depth.

Range: 0–127

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Contains no data
Contains data, sounds (Part ON)
Recorded part
Contains data, but is muted (Part OFF)

Play the keyboard to check that the appropriate
drum Voices can be heard. You can mute the
Parts during recording (except for the Part
you’re recording), by simply pressing the
[PART] button so that the mute mark is indicated at the Part. In this condition, the [PART]
button also changes from green to unlit.

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

● Rules for recording to non-rhythm Parts:

If you want to rehearse a part before recording,
press the [EXECUTE] button. The REC mark
for the Part in the display will turn off.
In this situation, you can start rehearsing by
pressing the [START/STOP] button.
Return to the Part record standby mode, after
stopping rehearsal by pressing the [START/
STOP] button, and then press the [EXECUTE]
button again.

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording
the Bass and PHRASE Parts (i.e., C, D, E, G,
A, and B).
• Use only the C chord tones when recording
the CHORD and PAD Parts (i.e., C, E, G, and
B).

C R C

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin
recording.

Play the keyboard and record the drum
Voices.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
recording.

NOTE
• Any desired chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO
and ENDING sections.

Press and hold the [-] button and play the
key or keys that correspond to the cleared
Voice.

Press the [START/STOP] button to exit from
the clear operation.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
recording.

Record to other Parts in other sections.

Clear the recorded drum Voices
To clear the recorded drum Voices, after starting
recording (refer to step 3 of the recording operation), follow the instructions below.
Only the rhythm Part can be cleared in this operation; other Parts (e.g., bass or chord) cannot be
cleared.

C = Chord notes
C, R = Recommended notes

Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you
make during your performance.

Since the entire Style plays repeatedly, you can
record at any point you like.

C R C

Save the Style data (page 71)

Bass, Chord, Pad and Phrase Part recording

Press and hold the [REC] button and press
the appropriate [PART] button to which you
want to record.

Press the [EXECUTE] button and check that
the REC mark appears at the Part in the display. In this condition, the [PART] button
also changes to red.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin
recording.

Play the keyboard and record your playing.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

■Editing (Quantize and part clear)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Quantize

Clearing a recorded Part

This function allows you to automatically align the
timing of all recorded notes.
1 measure
Actual recorded
note

When Quantize
is set to 1/8

When Quantize
is set to 1/4

1/4

1/8

1/2

Select a desired section for clearing, and then follow the instructions below.

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Part Clear” appears in the display.

Press and hold a desired [PART] button for
longer than a second.

3/4

1/4

1/2

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Quantize” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial and select the value.

NOTE
• You can also select a Part by rotating the dial. In this case, press the
[EXECUTE] button to clear.

Settings: 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32

A confirmation message appears.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The “UNDO” message appears.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again if you
want to replace with the previous Quantize
value.
NOTE
• If the recorded Part is not specified, Quantize cannot be set. Specify
the Part for recording and then use the quantize function.
• The undo icon on the display will disappear if you exit from the current display.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the
selected Part.

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

Saving the data
Saving the recorded data

Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Save” appears in the display.

A new user Style number is applied automatically and indicated in the display.

Press [+/YES] button to save the data.
NOTE
• If you select a User Style Number that already contains data, an
“Overwrite?” confirmation prompt appears. If you wish to save and
overwrite, press the [+/YES] button.

The following display appears when saving is
complete.

You can go back and set other sections with the
Section Settings (page 67) and then record
additional parts.

To save the Style to USB flash memory, refer to
the “Saving a User Song or User Style” section
on page 86.
If you want to change the user Style number, select the number by using the dial.
CAUTION
• If you select a User Style Number that already contains data,
the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.

NOTE
• If you want to exit from the Style Creator without saving, press the
[EXIT] button.
• A maximum of 50 Style files can be saved.

Press [EXECUTE] button to save the data.

● Deleting a User Style
1 Confirm that USB flash memory is not connected to the [TO DEVICE] terminal.
2 Press the [FILE MENU] button.
3 Use the Dial to select the user style data you
want to delete.
4 Press the [EXECUTE] button.
5 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the file.

A confirmation message appears.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

erenc
ef
R

Song Settings

Song Volume
1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
as many times as necessary to call up
Song Volume.

Song Volume

Can be set between 000 and 127

3 Use the dial to set the Song volume
between 000 and 127.

NOTE
• Song volume can be adjusted while a Song is selected.

Changing the Tempo
When playing the Song you can change the tempo as required. Press the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons. The tempo
display will appear and you can use the dial or the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from
5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing both the TEMPO [+] and [-] buttons.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display.
Pressing the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons allows single-step changes. Pressing and holding either button continuously increases or decreases the value.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

A-B Repeat
You can specify a section of a Song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback.
The A-B Repeat function is also very convenient for practicing when used along with the score display features of the instrument (page 30).

1 Play the Song (page 27) and press the
[A B] button at the beginning of the
section you want to repeat (the “A”
point).

3 The specified A-B section of the Song
will now play repeatedly.
You can cancel A-B repeat playback at any
time by pressing the [A B] button.

NOTE
• The current measure number is shown in the display during playback.
• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the
Song press the [A
B] button before starting playback of the Song.

Point A

2 Press the [A

B] button a second time
at the end of the section you want to
repeat (the “B” point).

Point B

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

Muting Independent Song Parts
Each “track” of a Song plays a different part of the Song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.
You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks
other than the ones you want to listen to.
Use the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button to select the TR 1–8, TR 9–16 and use the SONG PART [1/9]–
[8/16] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks ([1]–[8], [9]–[16]). Each track button is lit in
green when that track is not muted, and is unlit when the track is muted. Furthermore, the border around the
track number in the display disappears when that track is muted.
Refer to page 32 for information about the Song track configuration.

No track number ... No data.

Track number without border ... Track contains data but is muted.
Track number with border ... Track contains data and is not muted.

1 Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] but-

ton until the desired track is shown on
the display.
The following items appear on the display
when you press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]]
button.
“REGIST” ➝ “TR 1–8” ➝ “TR 9–16”.

REGIST.

TR 1 – 8

TR 9 – 16

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

2 Press the desired TRACK [1/9]–[8/16]

buttons to set the mute track.
To cancel the mute, press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY [1/9]–[8/16] buttons
again.
Display

Setting

TR 1–8

Specify the mute tracks of 1–8 by pressing the [1/9]–[8/16] buttons.

TR 9–16

Specify the mute tracks of 9–16 by
pressing the [1/9]–[8/16] buttons.

erenc
ef
R

MIXER

This instrument has a MIXER feature that lets you control the Part Volume, Pan, Reverb
Level and Chorus Level during playing of the Song or Style.
In the Song mode: Determine the group of track numbers, 1–8 or 9–16, then control the functions below.
In the Style mode: Directly control the functions below.
• Track ON/OFF
• Select the Mixer Parameter (Volume, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level)

Mixer Display

Current track ON/
OFF and Value

Track number

Parameter

Current track and its value are highlighted on the display.
In this example, Track 1 is selected and is set to ON, and its volume is 110.

Basic operation
1 Press and hold the [REGIST/PART

[MIXER]] button for longer than a second so that the Mixer display appears.

2 When in the Song mode, press the

[REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button and
select the desired group of tracks, 1–8
or 9–16.
The button toggles between tracks 1–8 and 9–
16.
In the Style mode, tracks 9–16 are selected
automatically.

When track 1–8
is selected

Control the parameter by using the
dial or the [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons.

To exit the mixer operation, press the [EXIT]
button.

When track 9–
16 is selected

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

MIXER

3 Press the desired [TRACK] button you
want to control.

4 Control the Parameter ON/OFF or other
parameters in each track.
(Refer to the following instructions.)
Repeat steps 2–4 and set other tracks if necessary.

5 Press [EXIT] to exit from the mixer operation.

The selected track will be changed to ON automatically.

Track ON/OFF and other parameter controls
■Track ON/OFF

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Determines whether each is track ON or OFF
(unmuted or muted)
Select the track you want to set ON/OFF (refer to
steps 1–3 of basic operation on page 75), and then
follow the instructions below.
The selected track will be changed to ON automatically.

1 Press the [TRACK] button again to set it

1 Press the CATEGORY [<]/[>] button to
select the desired item.

2 Rotate the dial and set the parameter.

to OFF.
The button toggles between ON and OFF, and
the [TRACK] button also changes between
Green to unlit.

■Parameter controls

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Enter the Mixer mode (refer to steps 1–3 of basic
operation on page 75), and then set the Volume,
Pan, Reverb Level and Chorus Level.
Volume

Determines the Part volume.

Range: 0–127

Pan

Determines the Pan position.

Range: 0–64–127

Reverb
Level

Determines the Reverb depth.

Range: 0–127

Chorus
Level

Determines the Chorus depth.

Range: 0–127

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Current
volume

Repeat steps 1–2 and set other tracks if necessary.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the
mixer operation.

erenc
ef
R

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 64 complete setups can be saved
(8 banks of 8 setups each).
Up to 64 presets (eight banks of eight each) can be memorized.
8 Banks

Memory 1

Memory 2

Memory 3

Memory 4

Memory 5

Memory 6

Memory 7

Memory 8

Color is used to indicate the status of individual memory buttons for the selected bank.
• Lit in Green .......Contains data
• Unlit ..................Does not contain data
• Lit in Red ..........Currently set button

Saving to the Registration Memory
1 Set the panel controls as required—

select a Voice, accompaniment Style,
etc.

2 Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] buttons

until the desired bank number is shown
on the display.
You can also use the dial in the Bank Select
display.

3 To store the current panel settings,

simultaneously hold down the [MEMORY] button and press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons.
The button corresponding to the stored Registration lights in Red.

NOTE
• You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration
memory button into USB flash memory as a user file (see page 85).

CAUTION
• If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the
new data.

CAUTION

Bank number

• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.

NOTE
• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during Song playback.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

Recalling a Registration Memory
Make sure that “REGIST” appears in the display (press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button until it is
shown).

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] button to
select the desired bank.
You can also use the dial to select the bank
number.

● Settings that can be saved to the Registration Memory
• Style settings*
Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,
Split Point, Style settings (Main A–D, INTRO 1–
3, ENDING 1–3), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord
Fingering, Upper Octave
• Voice settings
Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,
Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP
Level, Dry Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/
OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,
Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry
Level), Left Voice settings (Left ON/OFF, Voice
number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level)

Bank number

2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY

button, [1]–[8], containing the settings
you want to recall. The panel controls
will be instantly set accordingly.
The button to which the data is stored lights in
green and the currently set button is in red.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

• Effect settings
Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain ON/
OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type
• Harmony settings
Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony
Volume
• Other settings
Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Upper Octave
*Style settings are not available for Registration Memory
when using the Song features.

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

Registration Clear—Deleting a Specified Registration Memory
Keep in mind that groups of data cannot be deleted or cleared from the instrument at a single time.

1 Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] but-

ton a number of times until the “REGIST.” item appears.
The item changes in order from “REGIST.” to
“TR 1–8” to “TR 9–16”.

3 Press and hold the REGISTRATION

MEMORY button corresponding to the
Registration you want to clear for
longer than a second.

Hold for longer
than a second

A confirmation message will appear in the display.

2 Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] button a

number of times until the desired bank
number appears.
The Registration Memory button is lit in green
if Registration data is stored to the memory.

4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear a Reg-

istration Memory.
A confirmation message will appear again in
the display.
Use the [-/NO] button to cancel the clear operation.

5 Press the [+/YES] button again to clear
the Registration Memory.
The clear-in-progress message will appear
briefly on the display while the Song is being
cleared.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

erenc
ef
R

The Functions

The “Functions” provide a wide range of both detailed and overall instrument parameters, such as adjusting the tuning, setting the split point, and editing the voices and
effects.

Selecting and Setting Functions
There are 51 function parameters in all.

1 Find the function you want to set in the
list that begins on page 81.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Select a function. Press the CATEGORY
[ <] and [ >] buttons as many times as
necessary until the function’s display
name appears in the display.
Take a look at the function list starting on page
81.
The name of the previous item in the list
appears to the upper left, and the name of the
next item in the list appears to the upper right
of the currently selected item.

Function
group

Previous item

Current selected item

Next item

Parameter

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

4 Use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO]

buttons, to set the parameters.
The [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons are used to
make ON/ OFF type settings: [+/YES] = ON,
[-/NO] = OFF.
In some cases, pressing the [+/YES] button
will execute the selected function, and pressing [-/NO] will cancel the selection.
Press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (excepting
the initial setup of MIDI).

Press these simultaneously to recall the
default setting.

• Increment value by 1.
• ON
• Execute

• Decrement value by 1.
• OFF
• Cancel

The Functions

■ Function Setting List
Group
VOLUME
OVERALL

Function Item
Style Volume
Song Volume
Tuning
Pitch Bend
Range
Split Point

Display
Indication
Style Volume
Song Volume
Tuning
Pitch Bend
Range
Split Point

Range/Settings
000–127
000–127
415.3–466.2
01–12

Determines the volume of the Style.
Determines the volume of the Song.
Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound.
Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

036–096
(C1–C6)

Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets
the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates
the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point
setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.
Determines the sensitivity of the feature.

Touch Sensitivity Touch Sensitivity 1 (Soft),
2 (Medium),
3 (Hard)
Chord Fingering Chord Fingering 1 (Multi Finger),
2 (FullKeyboard)

MAIN
VOICE

Volume
Octave
Pan

Main Volume
Main Octave
Main Pan

000–127
-2–+2
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)

Reverb Level

000–127

DSP Level

Main Reverb
Level
Main Chorus
Level
Main DSP Level

000–127

Dry Level

Main Dry Level

000–127

Volume
Octave
Pan

Dual Volume
Dual Octave
Dual Pan

000–127
-2–+2
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)

Reverb Level

000–127

DSP Level

Dual Reverb
Level
Dual Chorus
Level
Dual DSP Level

000–127

Dry Level

Dual Dry Level

000–127

Left Volume
Left Octave
Left Pan

000–127
-2–+2
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
000–127

DSP Level

Left Reverb
Level
Left Chorus
Level
Left DSP Level

000–127

Dry Level

Left Dry Level

000–127

Chorus Level

DUAL
VOICE

Chorus Level

LEFT VOICE Volume
Octave
Pan

Reverb Level
Chorus Level

Description

000–127

Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode
both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of
the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode
normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be
detected, and the notes played will sound as well.
Determines the volume of the Main Voice.
Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.
Determines the pan position of the Main Voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being
panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being
panned full right.
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to
the Reverb effect.
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to
the Chorus effect.
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to
the DSP effect.
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s unprocessed
signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect processing).
Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.
Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.
Determines the pan position of the Dual Voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being
panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being
panned full right.
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to
the Reverb effect.
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to
the Chorus effect.
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to
the DSP effect.
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s unprocessed
signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect processing).
Determines the volume of the Left Voice.
Determines the octave range for the Left Voice.
Determines the pan position of the Left Voice in the stereo
image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned
full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned
full right.
Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to
the Reverb effect.
Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to
the Chorus effect.
Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to
the DSP effect.
Determines how much of the Left Voice’s unprocessed
signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect processing).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

Reverb Type

Display
Indication
Reverb Type

01–36

Chorus Type

1–45

DSP Type

001–239

Master EQ Type

PC MODE

Harmony Type
Harmony Volume
PC Mode

Harmony Type
Harmony
Volume
PC Mode

1 (Speaker 1),
2 (Speaker 2),
3 (Headphones),
4 (Line Out 1),
5 (Line Out 2)
01–26
000–127
PC1/PC2/OFF

MIDI

Local ON/OFF

Local

ON/OFF

External Clock
ON/OFF
Keyboard Out

External Clock

ON/OFF

Keyboard Out

ON/OFF

Style Out

ON/OFF

Song Out

ON/OFF

Initial Setup

YES/NO

Time Signature
Numerator
Time Signature
Denominator
Bell ON/OFF

Time Signature
Numerator
Time Signature
Denominator
Bell

00–60

Optimizes the MIDI settings for connecting to a computer
(page 95).
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls
the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 94)
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the
internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 94)
Determines whether keyboard performance data of the
instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).
Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via
USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Style playback.
Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via
USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Song playback.
Allows you to instantly send a data ‘snapshot’ of all panel
settings to a computer or sequencer. Press [+/YES] to
send, or press [-/NO] to cancel.
Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

2, 4, 8, 16

Sets the length of each metronome beat.

ON/OFF

Volume
Quantize

Metronome
Volume
Quantize

Determines whether the Metronome bell sounds at the
first beat in each measure or not.
Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Right-Part

Left-Part

GuideTrack 1–
16

Demo Cancel

ON/OFF

TG Mode

XG/Normal

Language

English/Japanese

Group
EFFECT

HARMONY

METRONOME

SCORE

UTILITY

LANGUAGE

Function Item

Range/Settings

000–127

1 (1/4 note),
2 (1/4 note triplet),
3 (1/8 note),
4 (1/8 note triplet),
5 (1/16 note),
6 (1/16 note triplet),
7 (1/32 note),
8 (1/32 note triplet)
GuideTrack 1–
16

Description
Determines the Reverb type, including off (36). (See the
list on page 126)
Determines the Chorus type, including off (45). (See the
list on page 127)
Determines the DSP type, including off (239). (See the list
on page 128)
Sets the equalizer applied to the instrument output
(including speakers, headphones or other output) for optimum sound in different listening situations.

Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 125)
Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

Depending on the Song data, you can make the score
more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This
determines the minimum timing resolution used in the
Song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and
eighth notes in the Song, you should set this value to
“eighth note.” Any notes or rests shorter than this value
will not be shown in the score.
Determines the guide track number for your right hand
lesson. The setting is effective for Songs except for preset
Songs.
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is effective for Songs except for preset
Songs.
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not.
When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even
if the [DEMO] button is pressed.
Determines whether the external Song is played accurately in XG format or not. When it is set to XG, the external Song is played accurately in XG format, but the Song
data may cause changes in the sound of your keyboardplayed parts.
Determines the display language for the demo displays,
Song file names, lyrics and certain display messages. All
other messages and names are displayed in English.
When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed
in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the Song data; however,
when no such setting exists, the setting here is used.

* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. (The exception
to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

erenc
ef
R

Using USB Flash Memory

USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory device is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, user Songs and
user Styles created on the instrument and the registered settings can be saved to or
loaded from the device. USB flash memory can also be used to transfer Song, Style
MDB data downloaded from the Internet to the instrument. Furthermore, user Songs
saved to USB flash memory in MIDI file format can also be used with these features.
In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash
memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.
If you don’t have a USB flash memory device, you will need to purchase one (or more, as
needed).
The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage
devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase.
Before purchasing a USB storage device, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice.
Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal”
section on page 93. For information about USB devices compatible with the instrument, see “Connection to
a USB Storage Device” on page 90.

Using USB Flash Memory
1 Connect a USB flash memory to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful
to insert it in the proper direction. (Do
not try to force an improper connection.)

CONNECT

You can go to the FILE CONTROL display
from which you can access USB flash memory
operations by pressing the [FILE MENU] button from this display.
(Do not press this button now, but only when
instructed to in the sections below.)

Check that the “CONNECT” message is
shown in the MAIN display.
NOTE
• No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE
CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related
to file functions will be active.
NOTE
• The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following
cases:
• During style or song playback.
• While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory.

Reference Page

USB Format

Load

Regist Save

User Song Save

User Style Save

USB Delete

*User Delete

* This particular menu item has no relation to USB operations, but it can be used to delete a User Song.

A message (information or confirmation dialog)
sometimes appears in the display to facilitate
operation. Refer to the “Messages” section on
page 108 for an explanation of each message.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

Formatting USB Flash Memory
A new USB flash memory device must be formatted before it can be used by this instrument.
CAUTION
• If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of
the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data
when using the format function.

1 After connecting the USB flash memory
to be formatted to the instrument’s USB
TO DEVICE terminal, check that the
“CONNECT” message is shown in the
MAIN display.

2 Press the [FILE MENU] button.

4 Press the [EXECUTE] button and the

display prompts you for confirmation.
You can press the [-/NO] button at this point to
cancel the operation.

5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the format operation will begin.
CAUTION
• Once the format-in-progress message appears in the display,
the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the
power or remove the USB flash memory device during this
operation.

6 A message appears in the display indi3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
to select the USB Format item.

The display prompts you for confirmation.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

cating that the operation is complete.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
NOTE
• If the USB flash memory device has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear in the display and you will not be able to
execute the operation.

Using USB Flash Memory

Saving the Registration Data
The registration data you created in the instrument can be saved to a USB flash memory device.

1 Make sure that a appropriately format-

ted USB flash memory device has been
properly connected to the instrument’s
USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that a
“CONNECT” message is shown in the
MAIN display.

2
3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
Press the [FILE MENU] button.

Cursor
left

Cursor
right

Delete
character

Select
characters

to locate the Regist Save item.
A default file name will automatically be created.

Cursor

6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis● To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a file that already exists
on the USB flash memory device, use the dial or
the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to select the
file, then skip ahead to step 6.
NOTE
• If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear in the display and you will not be able to execute the operation.
• If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory device
to save the data, an appropriate message will appear in the display
and you will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from
the USB flash memory device to make more memory available
(page 88), or use a different USB device.
• Refer to the “Messages” list on page 108 for other possible errors
that might prevent you from completing the operation.

4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor
will appear below the first character in
the file name.

5 Change the file name as necessary.
• The [1] button moves the cursor to the left,
and the [2] button moves it to the right.
• Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location.
• The [8] button deletes the character at the cursor location.

play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the save operation at this point
by pressing the [-/NO] button.

7 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the save operation will begin.
The Registration data will be stored to the
USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory
device.
CAUTION
• Once the save-in-progress message appears in the display, the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory device during this operation.

8 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the
MAIN display.

NOTE
• If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+/YES] if it is OK to overwrite the file,
or [-/NO] to cancel.
• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation
depends on the particular USB flash memory device you are using.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

Saving a User Song or User Style
This operation saves user Songs (Song numbers 001–005) or user Styles to USB flash memory. Songs are
saved in SMF Format 0.
● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

● To Overwrite an Existing File

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the
most common and widely compatible sequence
formats used for storing sequence data. There are
two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large
number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF
Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI
sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

If you want to overwrite a file that already exists
on the USB flash memory device, use the dial or
the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to select the
file, then skip ahead to step 8.

1 Make sure that a properly formatted

USB flash memory device has been
properly connected to the instrument’s
USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the
“CONNECT” message is shown in the
MAIN display.

6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor
will appear below the first character in
the file name.

7 Change the file name as necessary.
Refer to “Saving the Registration Data” on
page 85 for filename entry.

2 Press the [FILE MENU] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
to locate the User Song or User Style
Save item.
The SOURCE FILE—a user Song name or a
user Style name—will be highlighted.

Cursor

The name of the file to be saved

8 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the save operation at this point
by pressing the [-/NO] button.

9 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

The source user Song name.

4 Use the dial to select the source user

Song or Style.
You can press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons
simultaneously to select the first user Song or
Style.

5 Press the [EXECUTE] button.
The destination Song or Style will be highlighted, and a default name will appear for the
converted Song or Style file.

the [+/YES] button, and the save operation will begin.
The user Song will be stored to the USER FILE
folder in the USB flash memory device.
CAUTION
• Once the save-in-progress message appears in the display, the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.

10 A message appears in the display indicating that the operation is complete.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the
MAIN display.

NOTE
• If an existing filename is specified, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+/YES] if it is OK to overwrite the
file, or [-/NO] to cancel.
• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation
depends on the particular USB flash memory device you are using.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files
Registration files, Style files, Song files and MDB files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded to
the instrument.
You can also play the Song or Style file directly without loading (see page 89).
CAUTION
• If the same file name already exists in the instrument’s internal
memory, it will be overwritten.

1 With the USB flash memory device containing the file you want to load connected to the USB TO DEVICE
connector, check that the “CONNECT”
message is shown in the MAIN display.

2 Press the [FILE MENU] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
to locate the Load item.

4 Use the dial to select the Registration,

Style, Song or MDB file you want to
load.
All user files in the USB flash memory device
will be displayed first, followed by the Registration files.
NOTE
• The instrument will not recognize the style file if it is moved out of
the USER FILES folder.

5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the load operation at this point
by pressing the [-/NO] button.

6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the load operation will begin.
CAUTION
• Once the load-in-progress message appears in the display, the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.

7 A message appears in the display indi-

cating that the operation is complete.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

Deleting Data from USB Flash Memory
This procedure deletes selected Registration files, Song files and Style files from a USB flash memory
device.

1 Make sure that the USB flash memory

device containing the file(s) you want to
delete has been properly connected to
the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the “CONNECT” is shown
in the MAIN display.

2 Press the [FILE MENU] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
to locate the USB Delete item.

5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the delete operation at this
point by pressing the [-/NO] button.

6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the delete operation will begin.
CAUTION
• Once the delete-in-progress message appears in the display,
the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.

7 A message appears in the display indi-

cating that the operation is complete.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
NOTE
• If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear in the display and you will not be able to execute the operation.

● User Delete
This procedure deletes the selected User Songs in
the instrument’s internal memory.

4 Select the file you want to delete.
You can press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons
simultaneously to select the first Song or user
file on the USB flash memory.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

1 Press the [FILE MENU] button.
2 Use the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to
locate the User Delete item.
3 Follow the procedure described above from step
4.

Using USB Flash Memory

Playing Songs or Styles Saved to USB Flash Memory
1 Make sure that the USB flash memory

device containing the Song or Style you
want to play has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO
DEVICE terminal, and that the “CONNECT” is shown in the MAIN display.

2 To play a Song file, press the [SONG

MODE] button so that it lights. To play a
Style file, press the [SONG MODE] button so that it is unlit.

3 Press the [USB] button.

4 Use the dial to select a Song or a Style

you want to play.
Songs can be saved in a hierarchy when saved
to USB flash memory using a computer (refer
to page 91).
You can move the directory in the USB memory by pressing the CATEGORY [ < ]/[ > ] button.

5 Press the [>/■] button.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

erenc
ef
R

Connections

Connectors
q

q USB TO HOST terminal

This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 92 for more
information.

w USB TO DEVICE terminal

This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Connection to a USB
Storage Device” below.

Connection to a USB Storage Device
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created, as well as read or
play the data from the connected device.

■Compatible USB storage
devices ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

■Connection to a USB storage
device ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A USB storage device, such as a floppy disk drive
and flash memory can be connected to the USB TO
DEVICE terminal. Other USB devices such as a
computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.
Before purchasing USB storage devices, please
consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized
Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s
Manual) for advice.
CAUTION
• Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage
device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so
may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the
Save and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do
NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the
power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either
or both devices.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

CAUTION
• Some USB memory devices may require more current than the
instrument can supply, causing the instrument’s over-current protection function to be activated and making it impossible to use
the device. If this occurs “OverCurrent” will appear in the lowerright area of the MAIN display. To restore normal operation remove
the USB device from the USB TO DEVICE connector and turn the
instrument’s power off and then back on again.

Connections

Backing up the instrument data to a computer
Once you’ve saved data to a USB flash memory
device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of
your computer, then archive and organize the files
as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown
below.
Saves internal data to a USB flash memory.
USB TO DEVICE terminal

Instrument

Copying files from a computer hard disk to
USB flash memory and then playing back the
Songs on the instrument
Files on a computer’s hard disk can be transferred
to the instrument by first copying them to a USB
flash memory device, then connecting/inserting the
media to the instrument. User files, Style files and
MIDI Songs can be copied to a USB flash memory
device from the hard disk of the computer. Once
you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the
USB TO DEVICE terminal of the instrument and
play back the MIDI Songs, or load the user file or
Style file on the instrument.
Copying files from the computer’s hard disk to
the USB storage device

USB flash
memory

USB terminal

Disconnect the USB flash memory device from the
computer and connect it to the instrument.

Computer

Backing up data to a computer and
organizing files/folders

USB flash
memory

USB terminal
Computer

Disconnect the USB storage device from the
computer and connect it to the instrument.

Reading files on the USB storage device
from the instrument

USB flash
memory

USB TO DEVICE terminal

Instrument
USB flash
memory

IMPORTANT
• In order to play Songs or Styles copied to a USB flash memory
from a computer or other device, the files must be stored either
in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a first, second, or
third level folder. Songs stored here can be selected and played
as USB Song (page 28). Songs stored in fourth-level-folders
created inside a third-level folder cannot be selected and
played by this instrument.

USB flash memory (Root)
Song
File
Song
Folder

Song
File
Song
Folder

root

Song
File
Song
Folder

The directory can be moved using
the CATEGORY [ < ]/[ > ] buttons.

Can be
selected/
played.

Song
File
Song
Folder

Cannot be
selected/
played.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Connections

Connecting a Personal Computer
The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.
● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 94).
● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 96).

The connection procedure is as follows:

1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your

computer.
The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CDROM.
Installation of the USB MIDI driver is
described on pages 101–102.

2 Connect the USB terminal of the com-

puter to the USB terminal on the instrument using a standard USB cable (USB
cable sold separately).

The supplied CD-ROM includes instructions on
how to download the Musicsoft Downloader application from the Internet. This application lets you
transfer Song files from your computer to the
instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about
how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to
transfer Song files, see pages 103, 96.
USB TO HOST terminal

Computer

Instrument

USB cable

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

■ Precautions when using the [USB TO
HOST] terminal
When connecting the computer to the [USB TO
HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the
computer or the instrument freezes, restart the
application software or the computer OS, or turn
the power to the instrument off then on again.
CAUTION
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.
• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal,
exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby).
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument
on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO
HOST] terminal.
• Quit any open application software on the computer.
• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)
• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should
wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when
turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when
alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

Connections

■ Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal
This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure
to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.
NOTE
• For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

● Compatible USB devices
• USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive,
hard disk drive, etc.)
The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee
operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please
visit the following web page:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
NOTE
• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot
be used.

● Connecting USB device
• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the
device is appropriate and that it is connected in the
proper direction.
• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,
you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with
the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is
that of USB 1.1.

● Using USB Storage Devices
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you
can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as
well as read data from the connected device.
NOTE
• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

The number of USB storage device to be used
Up to one USB storage device can be connected to the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Formatting USB storage media
When a USB storage device is connected or media is
inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format
the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page
84).
CAUTION
• The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.
Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain
important data.

To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,
apply the write-protect provided with each storage device
or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,
make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing USB storage device
Before removing the media from the device, make sure that
the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save,
Copy and Delete operations).
CAUTION
• Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage
device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often.
Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data
(such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the
connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT
remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power
off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or
both devices.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Connections

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer
By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.
● When the instrument is connected with computer,
it transmits/receives performance data.
USB terminal

USB terminal

Computer

Instrument

USB cable

■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.
Item

Range/Settings

Description

Local

ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal
tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when
local control is off.

External Clock

ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to
a clock signal from an external device (ON).

Keyboard Out

ON/OFF

These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or
not (OFF).

Style Out

ON/OFF

These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out

ON/OFF

These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.

CAUTION
• If Local is set to OFF, the instrument will not produce any sound
when the keyboard is played.

2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons

to select the item you want to change its
value.

CAUTION
• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from
an external device, the Song, Style, and Metronome functions will
not start.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Connections

■PC Mode

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when
you want to transfer performance data between the
computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item
can conveniently make multiple settings for you in
one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,
PC2, and OFF.
This setting is not necessary when transferring
Song or backup data between the computer and the
instrument.

1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for
longer than a second so that the PC
Mode item appears.

Hold for longer
than a second

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook.
PC1

PC2*

OFF

Local

OFF

External Clock

OFF

Song Out

OFF

Style Out

OFF

Keyboard Out

OFF

2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.
NOTE
• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s Style, song, demo,
song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.
NOTE
• You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to
locate it (page 80).

Initial Send
This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a
sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup
data before the actual performance data.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]
to cancel.

2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons
to select the Initial Setup item.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Connections

Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument
MIDI Songs and Style files stored to a computer
can be transferred to the instrument.
Backup data can also be transferred from the
instrument to the computer and back.
In order to transfer Songs between your computer
and the instrument you will need to install the USB
MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM
on your computer, and then install the Musicsoft
Downloader from the Internet. Refer to Installation
Guide on page 99 for details.
● Data that can be transferred from a computer

• Data capacity (max): 1,895 KB
• The number of files that can be shown on the display is as follows:
100 Songs
50 Styles
50 MDBs
• Data Format: SMF format 0, SMF format 1,
Style file (extension: .sty), Backup
data
NOTE
• Even if the number of Songs transferred is less than 100, if the amount
of data exceeds 1,895 KB, the Song data cannot be transferred to the
instrument.

■With the Musicsoft Downloader
You Can ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●Transfer MIDI Songs and Style files you have
downloaded from the Internet or created on your
computer from the computer to the instrument’s
flash memory.
⇒ Refer to the procedure described
below.

■Use Musicsoft Downloader to
Transfer Songs from the Computer to the Instrument’s Flash
Memory ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
NOTE
• If a Song or Style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.

1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB MIDI driver to your computer, then
connect the computer and the instrument (pages 103, 101).

2 After selecting the language, double-

click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop.
This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window
will appear.
NOTE
• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader
is running.

3 Click the “Add File” button and the Add
File window will appear.

4 Click the button to the right of “Look in”
and select the folder from the dropdown menu that appears. Double-click
the “SongData” Folder on the window.
Select the file you want to transfer to
the instrument, and click “Open”.
q Click a Song file

●Backup data can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back.
⇒ Refer to the procedure described on
page 98.
Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.
w Click “Open”

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Connections

5 A copy of the selected MIDI Song file

will appear in the “List of files stored
temporarily” at the top of the window.
The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to
specify the destination for the transfer.
Click “Instrument,” and then “Flash
memory.”
“Flash memory” here refers to the internal
memory of the instrument.

7 Close the window to close the Musicsoft Downloader.

NOTE
• Before playing back the Song transferred from your computer, make
sure to close the Musicsoft Downloader program.

8 To playback a Song stored in the mem-

ory of the instrument, press the [USER]
button. Use the dial to select the Song
you want to play, then press the [>/■]
button to start playback.

CAUTION
• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will
the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear.

CAUTION
• Stored data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper
operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all
important data stored on your computer.

q Click “Electronic Musical Instruments”,
and then “Flash Memory”

6 After selecting the file in the “List of

files stored temporarily,” click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation
message will appear. Click [OK] and the
Song will be transferred from the “List
of files stored temporarily” to the
instrument’s memory.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Connections

■Transferring Backup data from
the Instrument to a Computer ● ●
You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer
Backup data (page 39) to a computer. If you click
“Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft
Downloader display, and then “System Drive,” a
file named “PSR-S550.BUP” will appear in the
lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader
display. This is the backup data. For details about
how to transfer backup data using the Musicsoft
Downloader application, refer to the Online help in
the application.
NOTE
• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.

CAUTION
• The backup data, including the five User Songs’ is transmitted/
received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when
transferring data.

CAUTION
• Do not rename the backup data on the computer. If you do so it
will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

● Using Songs with Notation
In order to use Songs with notation (SMF format 0
only) transferred from a computer for lessons and
practice, you’ll need to specify which channels are
to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand
parts.

1 Press the [USER] button and select the Song
residing in internal memory for which you want
to set the guide track.
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to
select the R-Part or L-Part item.
4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to
play back as the specified right- or left-hand
part.
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the
right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

erenc
ef
R

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
SPECIAL NOTICES

• The software and this Installation Guide are exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.
• Use of the software and this guide is governed by the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT which the purchaser
fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the
end of this guide before installing the application.)
• Copying of the software or reproduction of this guide in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer.
• Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this guide and the software.
• Copying of the commercially available music data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
• Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check and
download the latest version of the software from the following site.
http://music.yamaha.com/download
• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be
announced separately.

Important Notices about the CD-ROM
● Data Types
This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 101 for software installation instructions.
CAUTION
• This CD-ROM is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD
player, DVD player, etc.). Never attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.

● Operating System (OS)
The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

■ CD-ROM Installation Procedure

● ●

Before breaking the seal of the software packaging, please
read carefully the Software License Agreement at the end
of this guide.

Check the system requirements to make sure
that the software will run on your computer
(page 100).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.
The Start window should appear automatically. (Users
of Windows Vista will need to click [Start.exe] to open
the Start window after inserting the CD-ROM.)

Connect the instrument to the computer
(page 92).

Install the USB-MIDI driver to the computer
(pages 101–102).

Install the software (page 103).

Start up the software.

For subsequent operations, refer to the owner’s manual for
each software program (online help/PDF manual).
If you have any problems in driver installation, refer to the
“Troubleshooting” on page 104.
NOTE
• To view PDF files, you must install Adobe Reader on your computer.
If you do not have Adobe Reader, you can download the application
from the Adobe website at the following URL:
http://www.adobe.com

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Contents of the CD-ROM
The start window as shown below will appear automatically when you insert the included CD-ROM. (Users of Windows
Vista will need to click [Start.exe] to open the Start window after inserting the CD-ROM.) By clicking each menu on the
Start window, you can access the User Registration page on the Internet and download some of the wide variety of application software available.

Application / Data Name
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows 2000/XP)
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows Vista/XP x64)

Folder Name
USBdrv2k_
USBdrvVista_

Digital Music Notebook

DMN_

Digital Music Notebook
Flash Demo

DMN_FlashDemo

Musicsoft Downloader

(Available at Yamaha
website.)

Contents
This software is necessary when using your instrument with a computer via a
USB connection. It enables MIDI communication and control between the
instrument and the computer.
Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online
service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite Songs.
You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions
with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook.
Full-motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music
Notebook, from within the program.
Utilizing a connection between the instrument and a computer, this
application allows you to directly download Song data to the instrument.
Microsoft Downloader can be downloaded from the Internet.

* All the applications listed above are supplied with online/PDF manuals.

■Minimum System Requirements● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Application/Data

USB Driver for Windows
2000/XP

Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional

USB Driver for Windows
Vista/XP x64

Windows Vista/XP
Professional x64 Edition

Digital Music Notebook

Windows XP Home/
Professional Edition, Service
Pack 1a (SP1a) more/
Windows Vista
* Only 32-bit is supported.

Digital Music Notebook
(Requirements for
playing content with
video included.)

Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional/
Vista
* Only 32-bit is supported.

CPU
166 MHz or higher; Intel®
Pentium®/Celeron®
Processor family
800 MHz or higher; Intel®
Pentium®/Celeron®
Processor family or Intel® 64
compatible processor
400 MHz or higher processor
clock speed (Intel®
Pentium®/Celeron®
Processor family, or
compatible processor
recommended)
1 GHz or higher; Intel®
Pentium®/Celeron®
Processor family (1.4 GHz or
more is recommended)

Memory
32 MB or more
(64 MB or more is
recommended)
512 MB or more

128 MB or more
(256 MB or more
is recommended)

Hard Disk

Display

at least 3 MB
of free space

at least 150
MB of free
space

1024 x 768
HighColor
(16-bit)

256 MB or more

NOTE
• For the System Requirements of the other software available in the CD-ROM, see the respective download page on the web. The download page can be displayed by clicking the software menu on the Start window and the “download” button in the next page.

100

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Software Installation
■ USB-MIDI Driver

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To operate the instrument from your computer via USB,
you’ll need to install the appropriate driver software.
The USB-MIDI driver is software that transfers MIDI data
back and forth between sequence software and the instrument via a USB cable.
Computer
PSR-S550

Sequence
software
USB Cable
Driver

• For Windows XP: See below.
• For Windows 2000: See page 102.
• For Windows Vista: See page 102.

NOTE
• See the Yamaha Download page at the following URL for up-to-date
news on USB-MIDI driver:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/

NOTE
• If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP,” click
[Continue Anyway].

8
Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will
be using (D:, E:, Q:, etc.) The drive name is displayed
beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer”
folder. The root directory of the CD-ROM drive will
be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.

Installing the driver on Windows XP

1
2

3
4
5

Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows XP.
Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel].
If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click
“Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed.
Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the
left of “Ignore” and click [OK].
Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of
the window to close the Control Panel.
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.
The Start window will appear automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on the
instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB
cable to connect the USB connector of the
computer to the USB TO HOST connector of
the instrument. When the instrument is turned
on, the computer automatically displays the
“Found New Hardware Wizard.”
If the Wizard window is not displayed automatically,
refer to “Troubleshooting.”
If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the
lower right corner, wait until “Found New Hardware
Wizard” is displayed. (The Wizard window may take a
while to display on some computers.)
If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether
or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio
button for “No, not this time,” then click [Next].
Check the radio button to the left of “Install
the software automatically (Recommended).”
Click [Next]. The system starts the installation.

When the installation is complete, the system
displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Finish].
(The Wizard window may take a while to display on
some computers.)
Restart the computer.
If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the
lower right corner, wait until “System Settings
Change” is displayed. (The Wizard window may take a
while to display on some computers.)
NOTE
• This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer.

10 When using Windows XP Professional x64

Edition, the Support Module must be
installed.
After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the connected USB devices, select “My Computer” from the
Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select
“Open” from the pop-up menu. Select
“USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” →
“Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen directions.
NOTE
• Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary,
even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USBMIDI driver.

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

101

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Installing the driver on Windows 2000

Installing the driver on Windows Vista

3
4

5
6

Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows 2000.
Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔
[System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔
[File Signature Verification], and check the
radio button to the left of “Ignore-Install all
files, regardless of file signature” and click
[OK].
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.
The Start window will appear automatically.
First, make sure the POWER switch on the
instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB
cable to connect the USB connector of the
computer to the USB TO HOST connector of
the instrument. When the instrument is turned
on, the computer automatically displays the
“Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Next].
(The Wizard window may take a while to display on
some computers.)
If the Wizard window is not displayed automatically,
refer to “Troubleshooting” (page 104).
Check the radio button to the left of “Search
for a suitable driver for my device (Recommended).” Click [Next].
Check the “CD-ROM drives” box and uncheck
all other items. Click [Next].

2
3
4

NOTE
• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

5
6

NOTE
• The system may ask you to insert a Windows CD-ROM while it
checks for the driver. Specify the “USBdrv2k_” folder of the CD-ROM
drive (such as D:\USBdrv2k_\) and continue the installation.

Click [Next].
NOTE
• If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to
install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature,” click [Yes].

102

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows Vista.
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.
The AutoPlay window will appear.
Click [Run Start.exe].
The Start window will appear automatically.
First, make sure the POWER switch on the
instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB
cable to connect the USB connector of the
computer to the USB TO HOST connector of
the instrument. When the instrument is turned
on, the computer automatically displays the
“Found New Hardware” window. Click “Locate
and install driver software (recommended)”.
If the window is not displayed automatically, refer
page 104 for “Troubleshooting.” (Some computers
may take a while to display the window.)

If a message allowing Windows to search
online for driver software appears, click
“Don’t search online.”
If a message prompting you to insert the disk
that came with your device appears, click
[Next].
The system starts the installation.
NOTE
• If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is
authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install].

When the installation is complete, the system
displays the message “The software for this
device has been successfully installed.” Click
[Close].
(Some computers may take a while to display the window.)
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

■Digital Music Notebook ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

■Musicsoft Downloader

IMPORTANT
• When installing Digital Music Notebook to Windows XP, or
Vista, make sure to log on to the Administrator account.

IMPORTANT
• When installing Musicsoft Downloader to Windows XP, 2000 or
Vista, make sure to log on to the Administrator account.

• When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that
Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your
computer.

• To install Musicsoft Downloader, your computer must be connected to the Internet and be online.
• For the instrument including this Accessory CD-ROM, you can
use only the Musicsoft Downloader as a file transfer application
software. Other applications such as File Utility and Song Filer
cannot be used.

• Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music
Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible
for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to
make sure that your credit card can be used.

NOTE
• Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully
agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the
AGREEMENT on page 106 in English, before using the application.

2
3

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive of the computer.
The Start window appears on the screen. Each menu
on the window indicates the application or data contained in the Accessory CD-ROM.
Click “DIGITAL MUSIC NOTEBOOK” on the
Start window.
Click the “Install” button, and follow the onscreen instructions to install the software.
For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see
the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook
application and click “Help”.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive of the computer.
The Start window appears on the screen. Each menu
on the window indicates the application or data contained in the Accessory CD-ROM.

Click “Musicsoft Downloader” on the Start
window.
The page which explains the details about Musicsoft
Downloader is displayed on the window.

Click “Musicsoft Downloader Download” button at the bottom of the window.
The Download page on the web is displayed. Verify
that your system meets the requirements before installing the software.

● Uninstall (Removing the installed application)
To remove any installed application software:
Select [START] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] →
[Add/Remove Programs] → [Install/Uninstall],
then select the application to be removed and click
[Add/Remove...].
Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the
application.
NOTE
• The button names or menus may differ depending on the computer OS.
• For instructions on uninstalling the USB-MIDI driver, refer to “How
can I remove the driver?” in the “Troubleshooting” section (page
104).

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

103

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

■Troubleshooting

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● The driver cannot be installed.

● Playback response is delayed.

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?
Check the USB cable connection.
Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again.
• Is the USB function enabled on your computer?
When you connect the instrument to the computer for
the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does
not appear, the USB function on the computer may be
disabled. Perform the following steps.

• Does your computer satisfy the system requirements?
• Is any other application or device driver running?

Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware]
➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows XP/2000), or
select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for
Windows Vista).
* Classic View only in Windows XP.

Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub.” If
you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is
disabled.

● How can I remove the driver?
Start the computer and use the “Administrator”
account to log on to Windows.
Close all applications and windows that are open.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive.

Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware]
➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows XP/2000), or
select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for
Windows Vista).

Select [Start] ➔ [My Computer] (for Windows XP),
or select [My Computer] (for Windows 2000), or
select [Start] ➔ [Computer] (for Windows Vista).

Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open”
from the pop-up menu.

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_” folder ➔
“uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe” file and
launch the “uninstall.exe.” file.
Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the
driver.

Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View
devices by type.”

If you find “Other devices,” double-click it to
extend the tree to look for “Unknown device.” If
one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button.

Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and
make the connection again.

Install the driver again. (See pages 101–102.)

● When controlling the instrument from
your computer via USB, the instrument
does not operate correctly or no sound
is heard.
• Did you install the driver (pages 101–102)?
• Is the USB cable connected correctly?
• Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback
device, and application program set to the appropriate levels?
• Have you selected an appropriate port in the
sequence software?
• Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver?
The latest driver can be downloaded from the web
site (page 101).

104

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running.
• You may not be able to suspend/resume normally,
depending on the particular environment (USB Host
Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and
connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the
instrument functions again.

• Is any unknown device registered?
If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked
as an “Unknown device,” and you will not be able to
install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by
following the steps below.

● Cannot suspend or resume the computer
correctly.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

NOTE
• When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from the
“USBdrvVista_” folder.
• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

ATTENTION
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY
PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU
(AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).
BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH
THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT
Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)
and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term
SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and
data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is
protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While
you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of
SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant
copyrights.
•
•

•

You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.
You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form
for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such
backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce
Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were
on the original copy of the SOFTWARE.
You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the
SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the
recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS
•
•
•
•
•

You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation
or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any
method whatsoever.
You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the
SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE.
You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one
computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other
computers.
You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that
violates public policy.
You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE
without permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by
means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you
must observe.
•
•
•

Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any
commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.
Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated,
transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in
public without permission of the copyright owner.
The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be
removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission
of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION
This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE
and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this
Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and
immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must
immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written
documents and all copies thereof.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON
SOFTWARE
You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole
risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and
without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER
PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT
WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT
USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT
SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR
ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES,
LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF
THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability
to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or
otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be
attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data
accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the
provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for
any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE or your use thereof.
•

•
•

Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,
without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential
damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the
use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL
4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA
As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible
media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days
from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire
liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if
it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days
with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media
damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law
without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure
shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court
of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be
unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and
effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT
This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and
supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written
or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or
revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a
fully authorized representative of Yamaha.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

105

SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE
AGREEMENT
By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which will govern your use
of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product.
The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors.

1. Definitions

4. Disclaimer of Liability

In this License the following words and expressions have the following
meanings:
“License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if permitted by the
context, the conditional license granted to you in this agreement.
“Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One Park West,
Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius Software, of 20-23
City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK “Product”: the Software and the
Documentation.
“Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki, Inkpen2
and Reprise font families, any other programs or files supplied by the Licensor
which are included in or with the Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius
Scorch installer.
“Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the Software
supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor.

4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed hereunder free of
charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all warranties with respect to the
Product, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation any
warranties that the Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance
with the Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular
purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any liability to you for
any loss, cost, expense or claim (including without limitation any liability
for loss or corruption of data and loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and
any type of special, indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or
in connection with your installation and use of the Product.

2. License
2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable license to use
this Software in accordance with the Documentation on any number of
computers. Title to the Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the
Product remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the
rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are reserved.
2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the
Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make or permit
any third party to make any further copies of any part of the Product
whether in eye or machine-readable form.
2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,
(1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any part of it
for any purpose (including without limitation for the purpose of error
correction);
(2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the whole or any
part of the Product to be combined with or incorporated into any other
program, file or product, for any purpose; or
(3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than temporary
files created and required by your computer’s operating system or web
browser), including without limitation screen capture files, files
generated from the Software’s playback, graphics files and print files,
for any purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the
Software) for private non-commercial use.
2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, decompile,
decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part for
any purpose.
2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate, convert,
decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being read by any copy or
version of the Software or any data transmitted to or from any copy or
version of the Software, in whole or in part for any purpose.
2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any right of
copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or any other right
whatsoever of any other person or entity.

3. Copyright
3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and in the
components of the Product as between you and the Licensor belongs to the
Licensor or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws, national and
international, and all other applicable laws.

106

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

5. Termination
5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your destruction of the
Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to terminate this License in the
event of a material breach by you of any condition of this License or of any
of your representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder.
Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will
immediately delete the Software from your computer and destroy the
Documentation.

6. Miscellaneous
6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of the Licensor
of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder shall operate as a waiver
thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or
privilege preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of
any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor
in connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided
by law.
6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or otherwise transfer
the Product to any third party.
6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with the
Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on
www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time.
6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final expression of
their agreement with respect to the subject matter hereof and a complete
and exclusive statement of the terms of such agreement. This License
supercedes any and all prior understandings, whether written or oral,
between you and the Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof.
6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European Union:) This
License shall be construed and governed by the laws of England, and both
parties agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.
6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European Union:)
This License shall be construed and enforced in accordance with and
governed by the laws of the State of California. Any suit, action or
proceeding arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License
shall be brought and maintained only in the United States District Court
for the Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San Francisco.
Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such federal court over
any such suit, action or proceeding. Each party knowingly, voluntarily and
irrevocably waives trial by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including
any counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way
related or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof.
(License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007)

Appendix

Troubleshooting
Problem

Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical
power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it
further away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is
played or when a song or style is being played
back.

The style or song does not play back when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on
the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack,
no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 94.)
Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,
etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is
showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;
refer to “External Clock” on page 94.
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 81) is set to an appropriate
level.

The style does not sound properly.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 59).
Is the [ACMP] button lit? If it is not lit, press the [ACMP] button so it
lights.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting
the BaroqueAir Style in the MOVIE & SHOW category.

This is not a malfunction. Style BaroqueAir Style does not have a
Rhythm part, so there is no rhythm sound for this Style. Also, this
Style does not have a Fill-In section. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the
Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing
back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the
opposite effect. For example, pressing the
footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the
footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before
turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple
recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different
from note to note.

The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or
there are Japanese characters in the display messages.

Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to
English. (See page 12)

The ACMP indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP] button is pressed.

Always press desired style category button first when you are going
to use any style-related function.

There is no harmony sound.

The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their
type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are
played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is
played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether
style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two
notes at the same time.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

107

Messages
LCD Message

Comment

Access error!

Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media, USB flash memory or the internal flash memory.

All Memory Clearing...

Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power
off during data transmission.

Are you sure?

Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.

Backup Clearing...

Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory.

Cancel

Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.

Can’t clear TrackA.

Displayed when a track clear error occurs.

Clearing...

Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.

Com Mode

Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected
to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played
back.

Completed

Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission.

Create Directory

Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.

Data Error!

Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.

Delete File

Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Delete OK ?

Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not.

Delete Directory

Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Deleting...

Displayed while the delete function is engaged.

End

Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.

Exit.

Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropriate style has been selected during style record standby.

“File information area is not large enough.”

Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total
number of files have become too many.

File is not found.

Indicates there is no file.

“File too large. Loading is impossible.”

Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too
large.

Flash Clearing...

Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal
flash memory.

Format OK ? [EXECUTE]

Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not.

Formatting...

Displayed while formatting.

Load OK ?

Confirms whether loading is executed or not.

Displayed while loading data.

Media is not inserted.

Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.

Media capacity is full.

Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory
becomes full.

Memory Full

Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during recording.

“MIDI receive buffer overflow.”

Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to
proceed.

Move File

Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.

“Now Writing...
(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise
the data may be damaged.)”

Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while
writing. Doing so may result in data loss.

108

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Messages

LCD Message

Comment

OverCurrent

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the
overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO
DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

Overwrite ?

Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not.

Please Wait...

Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying
scores and lyrics, or stopping recording.

Rename File

Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Save OK ?

Confirms whether saving is executed or not.

Saved data is not found.

Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.

Saving...

Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while
saving. Doing so may result in data loss.

Send OK?

Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not.

Sending...

Displayed while transmitting data.

“Since the media is in use now, this
function is not available.”

Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the
media is being accessed.

Sure ? [YES/NO]

Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not.

“The limit of the media has been reached.”

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory
structure has become too complicated.

The media is not formatted.

Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.

“The media is write-protected.”

Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.

“The song data is too large to be
converted to notation.”

Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too
large.

There are too many files.

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files
exceeds the capacity.

“This function is not available now.”

Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is
executing another job.

[nnn] “file name”

Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the
receiving block.

NOTE
• Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages necessary to be explained only.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

109

Voice List
■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a
number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment
is used the total number of available notes for playing on the
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the
Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is
exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most
recent notes have priority (last note priority).

NOTE
• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for
each voice. Use these program change numbers when
playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.
• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1.
Remember to take this into consideration.
• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long
decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held.

● Panel Voice List
Voice
No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

110

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
Piano
1
0
113
1
2
0
112
2
3
0
114
1
4
0
112
7
5
0
113
7
6
0
112
4
7
0
112
3
8
0
113
4
9
0
114
4
10
0
113
3
E.Piano
1
0
114
5
2
0
118
5
3
0
115
5
4
0
118
6
5
0
113
6
6
0
119
5
7
0
120
5
8
0
116
6
9
0
112
5
10
0
112
6
11
0
116
5
12
0
114
6
13
0
115
6
14
0
113
5
15
0
117
6
16
0
117
5
17
0
112
8
18
0
113
8
Strings
1
0
117
50
2
0
116
50
3
0
122
50
4
0
114
49
5
0
113
41
6
0
112
49
7
0
113
49
8
0
112
52
9
0
112
50
10
0
116
49
11
0
113
50
12
0
112
45
13
0
115
50
14
0
112
51
15
0
112
46
16
0
125
49
17
0
112
42
18
0
112
43
19
0
112
44
20
0
113
111
21
0
112
47
22
0
113
47
23
0
113
108
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Voice Name

Live! Grand Piano
Live! Bright Piano
Live! WarmGrand
Harpsichord
GrandHarpsi
HonkyTonk
MidiGrand
Oct.Piano1
Oct.Piano2
CP80
Cool! GalaxyEP
Cool! SuitcaseEP
PolarisEP
JazzChorus
HyperTines
Cool! E.Piano
PhaseEP
NewTines
FunkEP
DX Modern
VintageEP
VenusEP
ModernEP
TremoloEP
SuperDX
StageEP
Clavi
WahClavi
Live! Strings
Live! Orchestra
Allegro Strings
Symphon.Str
Sweet! Violin
Strings
OrchStrings
AnalogStrs
ChamberStrs
BowStrings
SlowStrings
TremoloStrs
MarcatoStrs
SynStrings1
PizzStrings
Watariyat
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Er Hu
Harp
Hackbrett
Kanoun

Voice
No.
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
24
0
112
111
25
0
112
106
26
0
112
108
27
0
112
107
28
0
113
106
29
0
112
105
30
0
113
105
31
0
119
106
32
0
112
41
33
0
112
56
Guitar&Bass
1
0
116
25
2
0
117
26
3
0
115
27
4
0
114
29
5
0
114
26
6
0
118
26
7
0
117
29
8
0
125
28
9
0
113
26
10
0
115
31
11
0
116
26
12
0
117
30
13
0
112
28
14
0
115
25
15
0
115
28
16
0
116
30
17
0
126
28
18
0
117
31
19
0
117
28
20
0
119
27
21
0
115
30
22
0
113
31
23
0
115
26
24
0
118
28
25
0
123
28
26
0
115
29
27
0
114
30
28
0
124
28
29
0
120
28
30
0
113
27
31
0
114
28
32
0
113
28
33
0
114
31
34
0
122
28
35
0
112
31
36
0
119
28
37
0
113
30
38
0
112
29
39
0
113
29
40
0
116
31
41
0
112
26
42
0
112
30
43
0
114
34

Voice Name
Fiddle
Banjo
Koto
Shamisen
Oud
Sitar1
Sitar2
Pi Pa
SoloViolin
Orch.Hit
Dynamic Nylon
Live! SteelGuitar
Cool! JazzGuitar
Cool! Elec.Gtr
Sweet! Mandolin
Live! SlideSteel
Cool! SlideClean
Cool! VintageLead
Live! 12StringGtr
Cool! PowerLead
Live! DynamicSteel
Cool! BluesGuitar
Cool! CleanGuitar
Classic Guitar
PedalSteel
RockGuitar
VintageStrum
PowerChord
60’sClean
SmoothLead
VintageAmp
CrunchGtr
CampfireGtr
SolidGuitar
VintageOpen
VintageMute
LeadGuitar
ChorusGtr
VintageTrem
OctaveGtr
DeepChorus
TremoloGtr
HeavyStack
WahGuitar
Distortion
Elec.12Str
FeedbackGtr
MutedGuitar
FunkGuitar
VodooLead
FolkGuitar
Overdrive
Cool! ElectricBass

Voice List

Voice
No.
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
44
0
112
33
45
0
112
35
46
0
112
36
47
0
112
37
48
0
114
40
49
0
114
39
50
0
112
39
51
0
113
36
52
0
113
37
53
0
114
33
54
0
112
40
55
0
116
40
56
0
115
40
57
0
113
39
58
0
112
38
59
0
115
39
60
0
112
34
Saxophone
1
0
117
67
2
0
114
66
3
0
113
65
4
0
118
67
5
0
112
68
6
0
112
65
7
0
112
67
8
0
112
66
9
0
113
67
Flute&Woodwind
1
0
114
74
2
0
114
72
3
0
113
76
4
0
112
70
5
0
112
71
6
0
115
74
7
0
112
73
8
0
112
72
9
0
112
69
10
0
112
74
11
0
113
74
12
0
112
79
13
0
112
76
14
0
112
78
15
0
112
75
16
0
112
80
17
0
112
110
18
0
114
78
19
0
118
74
20
0
116
110
Organ
1
0
118
19
2
0
117
17
3
0
117
19
4
0
115
19
5
0
118
17
6
0
116
19
7
0
112
19
8
0
113
18
9
0
112
17
10
0
114
19
11
0
118
18
12
0
115
17
13
0
113
17
14
0
113
19
15
0
112
18
16
0
119
17
17
0
115
18
18
0
116
17
19
0
116
18
20
0
120
17
21
0
114
17
22
0
114
18
23
0
113
20

Voice Name
Aco.Bass
PickBass
Cool! Fretless
SlapBass
SubBass
HardBass
ResoBass
SuperFretless
FusionBass
Bass&Cymbal
AnalogBass
DrySynBass
80’sSynBass
HiQBass
FunkBass
ClickBass
MellowFinger
Sweet! TenorSax
Sweet! AltoSax
Sweet! SopranoSax
GrowlSax
BaritoneSax
SopranoSax
TenorSax
AltoSax
WoodwindEns
Sweet! Flute
Sweet! Clarinet
Sweet! PanFlute
EnglishHorn
Bassoon
Sweet! Class.Flute
Piccolo
Clarinet
Oboe
Flute
PanFlute
Whistle
EthnicFlute
Shakuhachi
Recorder
Ocarina
Bagpipe
Nay
Di Zi
Sheng
Cool! Organ
Cool! JazzOrgan
Cool! RotorOrgan
Cool! FullRocker
StadiumOrg
RotaryDrive
RockOrgan1
DanceOrgan
JazzOrgan1
PurpleOrg
Elec.Organ
DrawbarOrg
JazzOrgan2
RockOrgan2
ClickOrgan
GospelOrg
MellowDraw
BrightDraw
60’sOrgan
JazzOrgan3
Tibia 16+4
Tibia Full
ChapelOrgn1

Voice
No.
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
24
0
114
20
25
0
115
20
26
0
112
20
27
0
112
21
28
0
114
21
29
0
115
21
Trumpet
1
0
115
57
2
0
117
58
3
0
116
57
4
0
112
57
5
0
113
57
6
0
116
58
7
0
115
58
8
0
112
58
9
0
114
58
10
0
112
60
11
0
113
59
12
0
114
59
13
0
112
59
14
0
113
34
Brass
1
0
117
63
2
0
118
63
3
0
116
63
4
0
112
61
5
0
115
67
6
0
112
62
7
0
125
62
8
0
121
62
9
0
113
60
10
0
120
62
11
0
116
62
12
0
113
63
13
0
123
62
14
0
114
62
15
0
118
58
16
0
115
62
17
0
113
64
18
0
122
62
19
0
119
62
20
0
113
62
21
0
118
62
22
0
112
64
23
0
113
58
24
0
117
62
25
0
114
64
26
0
115
63
27
0
114
63
28
0
112
63
Choir
1
0
112
55
2
0
113
54
3
0
118
89
4
0
121
89
5
0
112
53
6
0
112
54
Pad
1
0
113
95
2
0
115
90
3
0
113
100
4
0
112
96
5
0
112
100
6
0
112
92
7
0
112
95
8
0
112
89
9
0
112
93
10
0
113
89
11
0
114
89
12
0
112
90
13
0
113
90
14
0
115
95

Voice Name
ChapelOrgn2
ChapelOrgn3
PipeOrgan
ReedOrgan
Harmonium1
Harmonium2
Sweet! Trumpet
Sweet! Trombone
JazzTrumpet
SoloTrumpet
FlugelHorn
Trombone
SoftTromb
SoloTromb
MellowTromb
MutedTrump
BaritonHorn
BaritonHit
Tuba
AlpBass
Live! PopBrass
Live! HyperBrass
Live! OctaveBrass
Live! FrenchHorns
BrassCombo
BrassSection
Sforzando
BigBrass
BallroomBrs
BrightBrass
MellowBrass
80’sBrass
SoftBrass
FullHorns
SmoothTromb
HighBrass
OberBrass
TrumpetEns
MellowHorns
BigBandBrs
PopBrass
AnalogBrs
Trb.Section
SmallBrass
SoftAnalog
FunkyAnalog
TechnoBrass
SynthBrass
AirChoir
GothicVox
SweetHeaven
DreamHeaven
Choir
VoxHumana
Insomnia
NeoWarmPad
CyberPad
Wave2001
Atmosphere
XenonPad
Equinox
Fantasia
DX Pad
Symbiont
Stargate
Area51
DarkMoon
Ionosphere

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

111

Voice List

Voice
No.
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308

112

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
Voice Name
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
15
0
115
89
GoldenAge
16
0
114
95
Solaris
17
0
117
89
Millennium
18
0
114
90
Dunes
Synth.&FX
1
0
122
82
Oxygen
2
0
123
82
Matrix
3
0
120
82
WireLead
4
0
113
81
HipLead
5
0
117
81
HopLead
6
0
116
82
FireWire
7
0
115
82
Analogon
8
0
114
82
Blaster
9
0
115
85
Skyline
10
0
112
81
SquareLead
11
0
112
82
Saw.Lead
12
0
118
81
TinyLead
13
0
121
82
FunkyLead
14
0
114
85
Paraglide
15
0
112
85
Portatone
16
0
113
82
BigLead
17
0
117
82
Warp
18
0
119
82
Fargo
19
0
113
85
Adrenaline
20
0
112
99
Stardust
21
0
112
84
AeroLead
22
0
114
81
MiniLead
23
0
113
88
Impact
24
0
113
99
SunBell
25
0
112
88
UnderHeim
26
0
116
81
HiBias
27
0
115
81
Vinylead
28
126
0
1
SFXKit1
29
126
0
2
SFXKit2
30
126
0
112
AnimalKit
Accordion&Harmonica
1
0
112
22
Musette
2
0
117
22
Steirisch
3
0
113
22
TuttiAccrd
4
0
115
22
SmallAccrd
5
0
116
22
Accordion
6
0
112
24
BallroomAcc
7
0
113
24
Bandoneon
8
0
114
22
SoftAccrd
9
0
113
23
ModernHarp
10
0
114
23
BluesHarp
Percussion
1
0
112
12
Vibraphone
2
0
113
12
JazzVibes
3
0
112
13
Marimba
4
0
112
14
Xylophone
5
0
112
115
SteelDrums
6
0
112
9
Celesta
7
0
112
10
Glocken
8
0
112
11
MusicBox
9
0
112
15
TubularBell
10
0
112
109
Kalimba
11
0
112
16
Dulcimer
12
0
112
48
Timpani
Drum Kit
1
127
0
1
StandardKit1
2
127
0
2
StandardKit2
3
127
0
5
HitKit
4
127
0
33
JazzKit
5
127
0
41
BrushKit
6
127
0
9
RoomKit
7
127
0
17
RockKit
8
127
0
25
ElectroKit
9
127
0
26
AnalogKit
10
127
0
28
DanceKit
11
127
0
49
SymphonyKit
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Voice
No.
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
12
126
0
41
13
126
0
44
14
126
0
36
15
126
0
37
16
126
0
65
17
126
0
115
18
126
0
125
19
127
0
128

Voice Name
CubanKit
PopLatinKit
ArabicKit
ArabicKit 2
ArabicMixKit
IndianKit
ChineseKit
ChineseMixKit

● GM&XG Voice List
Voice
No.
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
1
0
0
1
2
0
1
1
3
0
18
1
4
0
40
1
5
0
41
1
6
0
0
2
7
0
1
2
8
0
0
3
9
0
1
3
10
0
32
3
11
0
40
3
12
0
41
3
13
0
0
4
14
0
1
4
15
0
0
5
16
0
1
5
17
0
18
5
18
0
32
5
19
0
40
5
20
0
45
5
21
0
64
5
22
0
0
6
23
0
1
6
24
0
32
6
25
0
33
6
26
0
34
6
27
0
40
6
28
0
41
6
29
0
42
6
30
0
45
6
31
0
0
7
32
0
1
7
33
0
25
7
34
0
35
7
35
0
0
8
36
0
1
8
37
0
27
8
38
0
64
8
39
0
65
8
40
0
0
9
41
0
0
10
42
0
0
11
43
0
64
11
44
0
0
12
45
0
1
12
46
0
45
12
47
0
0
13
48
0
1
13
49
0
64
13
50
0
97
13
51
0
98
13
52
0
0
14
53
0
0
15
54
0
96
15
55
0
97
15
56
0
0
16

Voice Name
GrandPiano
GrndPianoKSP
MellowGrPno
PianoStrings
Dream
BrightPiano
BritePnoKSP
ElecGrandPno
ElecGrPnoKSP
DetunedCP80
LayeredCP1
LayeredCP2
Honkytonk
HonkytonkKSP
El.Piano1
El.Piano1KSP
MellowEP1
ChorusEP1
HardEl.Piano
VXfadeEl.P1
60sEl.Piano1
El.Piano2
El.Piano2KSP
ChorusEP2
DXEPHard
DXLegend
DXPhaseEP
DX+AnalogEP
DXKotoEP
VXfadeEl.P2
Harpsichord
Harpsi.KSP
Harpsichord2
Harpsichord3
Clavi.
Clavi.KSP
Clavi.Wah
PulseClavi.
PierceClavi.
Celesta
Glockenspiel
MusicBox
Orgel
Vibraphone
VibesKSP
HardVibes
Marimba
MarimbaKSP
SineMarimba
Balimba
LogDrums
Xylophone
TubularBells
ChurchBells
Carillon
Dulcimer

Voice List

Voice
No.
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
57
0
35
16
58
0
96
16
59
0
97
16
60
0
0
17
61
0
32
17
62
0
33
17
63
0
34
17
64
0
35
17
65
0
36
17
66
0
37
17
67
0
38
17
68
0
40
17
69
0
64
17
70
0
65
17
71
0
66
17
72
0
67
17
73
0
0
18
74
0
24
18
75
0
32
18
76
0
33
18
77
0
37
18
78
0
0
19
79
0
64
19
80
0
65
19
81
0
66
19
82
0
0
20
83
0
32
20
84
0
35
20
85
0
40
20
86
0
64
20
87
0
65
20
88
0
0
21
89
0
40
21
90
0
0
22
91
0
32
22
92
0
0
23
93
0
32
23
94
0
0
24
95
0
64
24
96
0
0
25
97
0
16
25
98
0
25
25
99
0
43
25
100
0
96
25
101
0
0
26
102
0
16
26
103
0
35
26
104
0
40
26
105
0
41
26
106
0
96
26
107
0
0
27
108
0
18
27
109
0
32
27
110
0
0
28
111
0
32
28
112
0
0
29
113
0
40
29
114
0
41
29
115
0
43
29
116
0
45
29
117
0
0
30
118
0
43
30
119
0
0
31
120
0
40
31
121
0
41
31
122
0
0
32
123
0
65
32
124
0
66
32
125
0
0
33
126
0
40
33
127
0
45
33

Voice Name
Dulcimer2
Cimbalom
Santur
DrawbarOrgan
DetDrawOrgan
60sDrawOrg1
60sDrawOrg2
70sDrawOrg1
DrawbarOrg2
60sDrawOrg3
EvenBarOrg
16+2'2_3Org
OrganBass
70sDrawOrg2
CheezyOrgan
DrawbarOrg3
Perc.Organ
70sPercOrg1
DetPercOrgan
LightOrgan
Perc.Organ2
RockOrgan
RotaryOrgan
SlowRotary
FastRotary
ChurchOrgan
ChurchOrgan3
ChurchOrgan2
NotreDame
OrganFlute
Trem.OrganFl
ReedOrgan
PuffOrgan
Accordion
AccordIt
Harmonica
Harmonica2
TangoAccord
TangoAccord2
NylonGuitar
NylonGuitar2
NylonGuitar3
VelGtrHarmo
Ukulele
SteelGuitar
SteelGuitar2
12StrGuitar
Nylon&Steel
Steel&Body
Mandolin
JazzGuitar
MellowGuitar
JazzAmp
CleanGuitar
ChorusGuitar
MutedGuitar
FunkGuitar1
MuteSteelGtr
FunkGuitar2
JazzMan
Overdriven
GuitarPinch
Distortion
FeedbackGtr
FeedbackGtr2
GtrHarmonics
GtrFeedback
GtrHarmonic2
AcousticBass
JazzRhythm
VXUprghtBass

Voice
No.
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
128
0
0
34
129
0
18
34
130
0
27
34
131
0
40
34
132
0
43
34
133
0
45
34
134
0
65
34
135
0
0
35
136
0
28
35
137
0
0
36
138
0
32
36
139
0
33
36
140
0
34
36
141
0
96
36
142
0
97
36
143
0
0
37
144
0
27
37
145
0
32
37
146
0
0
38
147
0
43
38
148
0
0
39
149
0
18
39
150
0
20
39
151
0
24
39
152
0
35
39
153
0
40
39
154
0
64
39
155
0
65
39
156
0
66
39
157
0
96
39
158
0
0
40
159
0
6
40
160
0
12
40
161
0
18
40
162
0
19
40
163
0
32
40
164
0
40
40
165
0
41
40
166
0
64
40
167
0
0
41
168
0
8
41
169
0
0
42
170
0
0
43
171
0
0
44
172
0
0
45
173
0
8
45
174
0
40
45
175
0
0
46
176
0
0
47
177
0
40
47
178
0
0
48
179
0
0
49
180
0
3
49
181
0
8
49
182
0
24
49
183
0
35
49
184
0
40
49
185
0
41
49
186
0
42
49
187
0
45
49
188
0
0
50
189
0
3
50
190
0
8
50
191
0
40
50
192
0
41
50
193
0
64
50
194
0
65
50
195
0
0
51
196
0
27
51
197
0
64
51
198
0
65
51

Voice Name
FingerBass
FingerDark
FlangeBass
Bass&DistEG
FingerSlap
FingerBass2
Mod.Bass
PickBass
MutePickBass
FretlessBass
Fretless2
Fretless3
Fretless4
Syn.Fretless
SmthFretless
SlapBass1
ResonantSlap
PunchThumb
SlapBass2
Velo.Sw.Slap
SynthBass1
SynBass1Dark
FastResoBass
AcidBass
ClaviBass
TechnoBass
Orbiter
SquareBass
RubberBass
Hammer
SynthBass2
MellowSyBass
SequenceBass
ClickSynBass
SynBass2Dark
SmoothSyBass
ModulrSyBass
DXBass
XWireBass
Violin
SlwAtkViolin
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Trem.Strings
SlwAtTremStr
SuspenseStr
PizzicatoStr
Orch.Harp
YangChin
Timpani
Strings1
StereoStrngs
SlwAtkStrngs
ArcoStrings
60’sStrings
Orchestra
Orchestra2
TremOrchstra
Velo.Strings
Strings2
S.SlowStrngs
LegatoStrngs
WarmStrings
Kingdom
70’sStrings
Strings3
SynStrings1
ResoStrings
SynStrings4
SynStrings5

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

113

Voice List

Voice
No.
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585

114

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
199
0
0
52
200
0
0
53
201
0
3
53
202
0
16
53
203
0
32
53
204
0
40
53
205
0
0
54
206
0
0
55
207
0
40
55
208
0
41
55
209
0
64
55
210
0
0
56
211
0
35
56
212
0
64
56
213
0
0
57
214
0
16
57
215
0
17
57
216
0
32
57
217
0
0
58
218
0
18
58
219
0
0
59
220
0
16
59
221
0
0
60
222
0
0
61
223
0
6
61
224
0
32
61
225
0
37
61
226
0
0
62
227
0
35
62
228
0
40
62
229
0
41
62
230
0
42
62
231
0
0
63
232
0
12
63
233
0
20
63
234
0
24
63
235
0
27
63
236
0
32
63
237
0
45
63
238
0
64
63
239
0
0
64
240
0
18
64
241
0
40
64
242
0
41
64
243
0
45
64
244
0
64
64
245
0
0
65
246
0
0
66
247
0
40
66
248
0
43
66
249
0
0
67
250
0
40
67
251
0
41
67
252
0
64
67
253
0
0
68
254
0
0
69
255
0
0
70
256
0
0
71
257
0
0
72
258
0
0
73
259
0
0
74
260
0
0
75
261
0
0
76
262
0
0
77
263
0
0
78
264
0
0
79
265
0
0
80
266
0
0
81
267
0
6
81
268
0
8
81
269
0
18
81
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Voice Name
SynStrings2
ChoirAahs
StereoChoir
ChoirAahs2
MellowChoir
ChoirStrings
VoiceOohs
SynthVoice
SynthVoice2
Choral
AnalogVoice
OrchestraHit
OrchestrHit2
Impact
Trumpet
Trumpet2
BriteTrumpet
WarmTrumpet
Trombone
Trombone2
Tuba
Tuba2
MutedTrumpet
FrenchHorn
Fr.HornSolo
FrenchHorn2
HornOrchestr
BrassSection
Tp&TbSection
BrassSect2
HighBrass
MellowBrass
SynthBrass1
QuackBrass
ResoSynBrass
PolyBrass
SynthBrass3
JumpBrass
AnaVelBrass1
AnalogBrass1
SynthBrass2
SoftBrass
SynthBrass4
ChoirBrass
AnaVelBrass2
AnalogBrass2
SopranoSax
AltoSax
SaxSection
HyperAltoSax
TenorSax
BreathyTenor
SoftTenorSax
TenorSax2
BaritoneSax
Oboe
EnglishHorn
Bassoon
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
PanFlute
BlownBottle
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
SquareLead
SquareLead2
LMSquare
Hollow

Voice
No.
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
270
0
19
81
271
0
64
81
272
0
65
81
273
0
66
81
274
0
0
82
275
0
6
82
276
0
8
82
277
0
18
82
278
0
19
82
279
0
20
82
280
0
24
82
281
0
25
82
282
0
40
82
283
0
41
82
284
0
45
82
285
0
96
82
286
0
0
83
287
0
65
83
288
0
0
84
289
0
64
84
290
0
0
85
291
0
64
85
292
0
65
85
293
0
0
86
294
0
24
86
295
0
64
86
296
0
0
87
297
0
35
87
298
0
0
88
299
0
16
88
300
0
64
88
301
0
65
88
302
0
0
89
303
0
64
89
304
0
0
90
305
0
16
90
306
0
17
90
307
0
18
90
308
0
64
90
309
0
65
90
310
0
0
91
311
0
64
91
312
0
65
91
313
0
66
91
314
0
67
91
315
0
0
92
316
0
64
92
317
0
66
92
318
0
67
92
319
0
0
93
320
0
64
93
321
0
65
93
322
0
0
94
323
0
64
94
324
0
65
94
325
0
0
95
326
0
0
96
327
0
20
96
328
0
27
96
329
0
64
96
330
0
66
96
331
0
0
97
332
0
45
97
333
0
64
97
334
0
65
97
335
0
66
97
336
0
0
98
337
0
27
98
338
0
64
98
339
0
0
99
340
0
12
99

Voice Name
Shroud
Mellow
SoloSine
SineLead
SawtoothLead
SawtoothLd2
ThickSaw
DynamicSaw
DigitalSaw
BigLead
HeavySynth
WaspySynth
PulseSaw
Dr.Lead
VelocityLead
Seq.Analog
CalliopeLead
PureLead
ChiffLead
Rubby
CharangLead
DistortedLd
WireLead
VoiceLead
SynthAahs
VoxLead
FifthsLead
BigFive
Bass&Lead
Big&Low
Fat&Perky
SoftWhirl
NewAgePad
Fantasy
WarmPad
ThickPad
SoftPad
SinePad
HornPad
RotaryStrngs
PolySynthPad
PolyPad80
ClickPad
AnalogPad
SquarePad
ChoirPad
Heaven
Itopia
CCPad
BowedPad
Glacier
GlassPad
MetallicPad
TinePad
PanPad
HaloPad
SweepPad
Shwimmer
Converge
PolarPad
Celestial
Rain
ClaviPad
HarmoRain
AfricanWind
Carib
SoundTrack
Prologue
Ancestral
Crystal
SynthDr.Comp

Voice List

Voice
No.
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
341
0
14
99
342
0
18
99
343
0
35
99
344
0
40
99
345
0
41
99
346
0
42
99
347
0
64
99
348
0
65
99
349
0
66
99
350
0
67
99
351
0
68
99
352
0
69
99
353
0
70
99
354
0
71
99
355
0
72
99
356
0
0
100
357
0
18
100
358
0
19
100
359
0
40
100
360
0
64
100
361
0
65
100
362
0
66
100
363
0
67
100
364
0
0
101
365
0
64
101
366
0
96
101
367
0
0
102
368
0
64
102
369
0
65
102
370
0
66
102
371
0
67
102
372
0
68
102
373
0
70
102
374
0
71
102
375
0
96
102
376
0
0
103
377
0
8
103
378
0
14
103
379
0
64
103
380
0
65
103
381
0
66
103
382
0
67
103
383
0
68
103
384
0
69
103
385
0
0
104
386
0
64
104
387
0
0
105
388
0
32
105
389
0
35
105
390
0
96
105
391
0
97
105
392
0
0
106
393
0
28
106
394
0
96
106
395
0
97
106
396
0
98
106
397
0
0
107
398
0
0
108
399
0
96
108
400
0
97
108
401
0
0
109
402
0
0
110
403
0
0
111
404
0
0
112
405
0
64
112
406
0
96
112
407
0
97
112
408
0
0
113
409
0
96
113
410
0
97
113
411
0
98
113

Voice Name
Popcorn
TinyBells
RoundGlocken
GlockenChime
ClearBells
ChorusBells
SynthMallet
SoftCrystal
LoudGlocken
ChristmasBel
VibeBells
DigitalBells
AirBells
BellHarp
Gamelimba
Atmosphere
WarmAtmos.
HollwRelease
NylonElPiano
NylonHarp
HarpVox
Atmos.Pad
Planet
Brightness
FantasyBells
Smokey
Goblins
GoblinsSynth
Creeper
RingPad
Ritual
ToHeaven
Night
Glisten
BellChoir
Echoes
Echoes2
EchoPan
EchoBells
BigPan
SynthPiano
Creation
StarDust
Reso&Panning
Sci-Fi
Starz
Sitar
DetunedSitar
Sitar2
Tambra
Tamboura
Banjo
MutedBanjo
Rabab
Gopichant
Oud
Shamisen
Koto
Taisho-kin
Kanoon
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
Shanai
Shanai2
Pungi
Hichiriki
TinkleBell
Bonang
Altair
GamelanGongs

Voice
No.
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796

Bank Select
MIDI
Voice
Program
No.
MSB LSB
Change#
(category) (0–127) (0–127)
(1–128)
412
0
99
113
413
0
100
113
414
0
101
113
415
0
0
114
416
0
0
115
417
0
97
115
418
0
98
115
419
0
0
116
420
0
96
116
421
0
0
117
422
0
96
117
423
0
0
118
424
0
64
118
425
0
65
118
426
0
66
118
427
0
0
119
428
0
64
119
429
0
65
119
430
0
0
120
431
0
0
121
432
0
0
122
433
0
0
123
434
0
0
124
435
0
0
125
436
0
0
126
437
0
0
127
438
0
0
128
439
64
0
1
440
64
0
2
441
64
0
4
442
64
0
17
443
64
0
33
444
64
0
34
445
64
0
35
446
64
0
36
447
64
0
37
448
64
0
38
449
64
0
49
450
64
0
50
451
64
0
51
452
64
0
55
453
64
0
56
454
64
0
65
455
64
0
66
456
64
0
67
457
64
0
68
458
64
0
69
459
64
0
70
460
64
0
71
461
64
0
81
462
64
0
82
463
64
0
83
464
64
0
84
465
64
0
85
466
64
0
86
467
64
0
87
468
64
0
88
469
64
0
89
470
64
0
90
471
64
0
91
472
64
0
97
473
64
0
98
474
64
0
99
475
64
0
100
476
64
0
101
477
64
0
113
478
64
0
114
479
64
0
115
480
64
0
116

Voice Name
StereoGamlan
RamaCymbal
AsianBells
Agogo
SteelDrums
GlassPerc.
ThaiBells
Woodblock
Castanets
TaikoDrum
GranCassa
MelodicTom
MelodicTom2
RealTom
RockTom
SynthDrum
AnalogTom
ElectroPerc.
Rev.Cymbal
GtrFretNoise
BreathNoise
Seashore
BirdTweet
TelephonRing
Helicopter
Applause
Gunshot
CuttingNoise
CuttingNoiz2
StringSlap
Fl.KeyClick
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Dog
Horse
BirdTweet2
Ghost
Maou
PhoneCall
DoorSqueak
DoorSlam
ScratchCut
ScratchSplit
WindChime
TelphonRing2
CarEngineIgn
CarTiresSqel
CarPassing
CarCrash
Siren
Train
JetPlane
Starship
Burst
RollrCoaster
Submarine
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heartbeat
FootSteps
MachineGun
LaserGun
Explosion
Firework

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

115

Drum Kit List
• “
” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
• Each percussion voice uses one note.
• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “1:
Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
• Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed
to be played alternately with each other.)
• *: XG optional kit.

Voice No.
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)
Keyboard
MIDI
Key Alternate
Note#

C#1

D1
E1
F1

D#1

F#1

G1
G#1
A1
B1
C2

A#1

C#2

D2
E2
F2

D#2

F#2

G2
G#2
A2
B2
C3

A#2

C#3

D3
E3
F3

D#3

F#3

G3
G#3
A3
B3
C4

A#3

C#4

D4
E4
F4

D#4

F#4

G4
G#4
A4
B4
C5

A#4

C#5

D5
E5
F5

D#5

F#5

G5
G#5
A5
B5
C6

A#5

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

116

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Note#

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Off

Group

3
3

4
4

O
O
O

1
1
1

O
O
O

2
2

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

1
127/000/001

2
127/000/002

3
127/000/005

4
127/000/033

5
127/000/041

6
127/000/009

Standard Kit 1

Standard Kit 2

Hit Kit*

Jazz Kit

Brush Kit

Room Kit

Snare Electro

Snare Jazz H

Brush Slap 2

Kick Jazz

Kick Small

Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Caanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba While H
Samba While L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree

Snare Roll 2
Snare Soft 2

Kick Tight L
Open Rim Shot H Short Snare Pitched
Kick Tight Short
Kick Wet
Kick Short
Kick Tight H
Stick Ambient
Snare Short
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight H

Snare Jazz L

Brush Slap 3

Snare Snappy

Snare Tight 2
Hybrid Tom 1
Hi-Hat Close 2
Hybrid Tom 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5

Snare Jazz M
Tom Jazz 1

Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1

Snare Tight Snappy
Tom Room 1

Tom Jazz 2

Tom Brush 2

Tom Room 2

Tom Jazz 3

Tom Brush 3

Tom Room 3

Tom Jazz 4
Tom Jazz 5

Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5

Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5

Hybrid Tom 6

Tom Jazz 6

Tom Brush 6

Tom Room 6

Drum Kit List

Voice No.
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)
Keyboard
MIDI
Key Alternate
Note#

C#1

D1
E1
F1

D#1

F#1

G1
G#1
A1
B1
C2

A#1

C#2

D2
E2
F2

D#2

F#2

G2
G#2
A2
B2
C3

A#2

C#3

D3
E3
F3

D#3

F#3

G3
G#3
A3
B3
C4

A#3

C#4

D4
E4
F4

D#4

F#4

G4
G#4
A4
B4
C5

A#4

C#5

D5
E5
F5

D#5

F#5

G5
G#5
A5
B5
C6

A#5

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Note#

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Off

Group

3
3

4
4

O
O
O

1
1
1

O
O
O

2
2

1
127/000/001

7
127/000/017

8
127/000/025

9
127/000/026

Standard Kit 1

Rock Kit

Electronic Kit

Analog Kit

10
127/000/28
Dance Kit
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2

Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2

Reverse Cymbal

Snare Noisy

Hi Q 2
Snare Snappy Electro

Kick Tight 2

Kick 3

Kick 2
Kick Gate

Kick Gate
Kick Gate Heavy

Snare Rock

Snare Noisy 2

Snare Rock Rim
Tom Rock 1

Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1

Tom Rock 2

Tom Electro 2

Tom Rock 3

Tom Electro 3

Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5

Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5

Tom Rock 6

Tom Electro 6

Dance Percussion 1
Reverse Dance 1
Dance Percussion 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Snare Aanalog 3
Vinyl Noise
Snare Analog 4
Reverse Cymbal
Reverse Cymbal
Reverse Dance 2
Hi Q 2
Hi Q 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Techno
Snare Dance 1
Kick Tight 2
Kick Techno Q
Rim Gate
Kick Analog Short
Kick Techno L
Kick Analog
Kick Techno
Side Stick Analog
Side Stick Analog
Snare Analog
Snare Clap
Dance Clap
Snare Analog 2
Snare Dry
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 1
Hi-Hat Closed Analog
Hi-Hat Closed Analog3
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 2
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 3
Hi-Hat Open Analog
Hi-Hat Open Analog 2
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Tom Analog 6

Tambourine Analog

Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2

Cowbell Analog

Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L

Vibraslap Analog
Ride Analog
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L

Maracas 2

Claves 2

Claves 2
Dance Percussion 3
Dance Percussion 4
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2

Scratch H 2
Scratch L 3

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

117

Drum Kit List

Voice No.
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)
Keyboard
MIDI
Key Alternate
Note#

C#1

D1
E1
F1

D#1

F#1

G1
G#1
A1
B1
C2

A#1

C#2

D2
E2
F2

D#2

F#2

G2
G#2
A2
B2
C3

A#2

C#3

D3
E3
F3

D#3

F#3

G3
G#3
A3
B3
C4

A#3

C#4

D4
E4
F4

D#4

F#4

G4
G#4
A4
B4
C5

A#4

C#5

D5
E5
F5

D#5

F#5

G5
G#5
A5
B5
C6

A#5

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

118

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Note#

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Off

Group

3
3

4
4

O
O
O

1
1
1

O
O
O

2
2

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

1
127/000/001
Standard Kit 1
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Caanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba While H
Samba While L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree

11
127/000/049
Symphony Kit

12
126/000/41
CubanKit

13
126/000/44
PopLatinKit

14
126/000/36
Alternate
Group

ArabicKit

Hand Clap

Kick Soft 2
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa Mute
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Tom Jazz 1
Tom Jazz 2
Tom Jazz 3
Tom Jazz 4
Tom Jazz 5
Hand Cymbal
Tom Jazz 6
Hand Cymbal Short

Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H Slap Open
Conga H Slap
Conga H Slap Mute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L Slap Open
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
Bongo H Open 1 finger
Bongo H Open 3 finger
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 finger
Bongo L Open 3 finger
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
Timbale L Open

Paila L
Timbale H Open

Nakarazan Dom
Cabasa
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Kick Soft
Snare Soft
Arabic Hand Clap
Snare

Crash Cymbal 2
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak

Hand Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Short

Paila H
Cowbell Top

Guiro Short
Guiro Long

Tambourine

Maracas
Shaker
Cabasa

Maracas
Shaker
Cabasa
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open

Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Bell Tree

1
1

Duhulla Sak
Claves
Doff Dom
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Katem Tak
Doff Tak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak1
Tabla Tik
Tabla Tak2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Roll of Edge
Tabla Flam
Sagat 1
Tabel Dom
Sagat 3
Tabel Tak
Sagat 2
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 2
Rik Finger 1
Rik Tak 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik Brass Tremolo
Rik Sak
Rik Tik

Drum Kit List

Voice No.
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)
Keyboard
MIDI
Key Alternate
Note#

C#1

D1
E1
F1

D#1

F#1

G1
G#1
A1
B1
C2

A#1

C#2

D2
E2
F2

D#2

F#2

G2
G#2
A2
B2
C3

A#2

C#3

D3
E3
F3

D#3

F#3

G3
G#3
A3
B3
C4

A#3

C#4

D4
E4
F4

D#4

F#4

G4
G#4
A4
B4
C5

A#4

C#5

D5
E5
F5

D#5

F#5

G5
G#5
A5
B5
C6

A#5

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Note#

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Off

Group

3
3

4
4

O
O
O

1
1
1

O
O
O

2
2

15
126/000/037
Arabic Kit 2
Zarb Back mf
Zarb Tom f
Zarb Eshareh
Zarb Whipping
Tombak Tom f
Neghareh Tom f
Tombak Back f
Neghareh Back f
Tombak Snap f
Neghareh Pelang f
Tombak Trill
Khaligi Clap 1
Arabic Zalgouta Open
Khaligi Clap 2
Arabic Zalgouta Close
Arabic Hand Clap
Tabel Tak 1
Sagat 1
Tabel Dom
Sagat 2
Tabel Tak 2
Sagat 3
Riq Tik 3
Riq Tik 2
Riq Tik Hard 1
Riq Tik 1
Riq Tik Hard 2
Riq Tik Hard 3
Riq Tish
Riq Snouj 2
Riq Roll
Riq Snouj 1
Riq Sak
Riq Snouj 3
Riq Snouj 4
Riq Tak 1
Riq Brass 1
Riq Tak 2
Riq Brass 2
Riq Dom
Katem Tak Doff
Katem Dom
Katem Sak 1
Katem Tak 1
Katem Sak 2
Katem Tak 2
Daholla Sak 2
Daholla Sak 1
Daholla Tak 1
Daholla Dom
Daholla Tak 2
Tablah Prok
Tablah Dom 2
Tablah Roll of Edge
Tablah Tak Finger 4
Tablah Tak Trill 1
Tablah Tak Finger 3
Tablah Tak Trill 2
Tablah Tak Finger 2
Tablah Tak Finger 1
Tablah Tik 2
Tablah Tik 4
Tablah Tik 3
Tablah Tik 1
Tablah Tak 3
Tablah Tak 1
Tablah Tak 4
Tablah Tak 2
Tablah Sak 2
Tablah Tremolo
Tablah Sak 1
Tablah Dom 1

16
126/000/065
Arabic Mix Kit
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Vibraslap
Kick Techno L
Side Stick Arabic Mix
Snare Techno
Guiro Long
Kick Techno Q
Open Rim Shot
Funk Snare 2
Kick Arabic Mix
Funk Snare 1
Snare Arabic Mix
Hand Clap
Snare
Tom Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed Arabic Mix
Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Half Arabic Mix
Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open Arabic Mix
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Electro 6
Hi-Hat Open 3
Reverse Cymbal
Timbale L
Conga H Open
Timbale H
Conga H Mute
Tambourine
Conga L
Cowbell
Claves
Bongo H
Wood Block H
Bongo L
Wood Block L
Kurdish Dohol Low f
Cabasa
Kurdish Dohol High f
Shaker
Snap 1
Maracas
Snap 2
Khaligi Twaisat 3
Khaligi Twaisat 1
Khaligi Twaisat 2
Khaligi Twaisat 5 Open
Khaligi Twaisat 4 Open
Khaligi Tablah Small Dom
Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Dom
Khaligi Tablah Small Snap
Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Sak
Khaligi Tablah Small Sak
Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Tak
Khaligi Tablah Small Tik
Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1
Khaligi Tar Segal Dom
Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1
Khaligi Tar Segal Tak
Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1
Tablah Dom 1
Tablah Tak 1
Tablah Tremolo
Tablah Tak 2
Tablah Tik 1
Tablah Sak 1
Tablah Tik 3
Tablah Tik 2

17
126/000/115
Alternate
Group

1
1
1

3
3
3
3
3
2

2
2

Indian Kit
Indian Hand Clap
Dafli Open
Dafli Slap
Dafli Rim
Duff Open
Duff Slap
Duff Rim
Hatheli Long
Hatheli Short
Baya ge
Baya ke
Baya ghe
Baya ka
Tabla na
Tabla tin
Tablabaya dha
Dhol 1 Open
Dhol 1 Slap
Dhol 1 Mute
Dhol 1 Open Slap
Dhol 1 Roll
Dandia Short
Dandia Long
Chutki
Chipri
Khanjira Open
Khanjira Slap
Khanjira Mute
Khanjira Bendup
Khanjira Benddown
Dholak 1 Open
Dholak 1 Mute
Dholak 1 Slap
Dhol 2 Open
Dhol 2 Slap
Dhol 2 Rim
Mridangam na
Mridangam din
Mridangam ki
Mridangam ta
Mridangam Chapu
Mridangam Lo Closed
Mridangam Lo Open
Chimta Normal
Chimta Ring
Dholki Hi Open
Dholki Hi Mute
Dholki Lo Open
Dholki Hi Slap
Dholki Lo Slide
Khol Open
Khol slide
Khol Mute
Manjira Open
Manjira Close
Jhanji Open
Jhanji Close
Mondira Open
Mondira Close
Indian Bhangra Scat 1
Indian Bhangra Scat 2
Indian Bhangra Scat 3
indian Bhangra Scat 4
Khomokh Normal
Khomokh Mute
Khomokh mltatk
Thavil Open
Thavil Slap
Thavil Mute
Khartaal
Dholak 2 Open
Dholak 2 Slide
Dholak 2 Rim 1
Dholak 2 Rim 2
Dholak 2 Ring
Dholak 2 Slap
G Dholak Body

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Alternate
Group

1
1

2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
5
5
5
6
6

7
7
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
12
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17

18
18

119

Drum Kit List

● Synth. & FX
Voice No.
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)
Keyboard
MIDI
Key Alternate
Note#

C#1

D1
E1
F1

D#1

F#1

G1
G#1
A1
B1
C2

A#1

C#2

D2
E2
F2

D#2

F#2

G2
G#2
A2
B2
C3

A#2

C#3

D3
E3
F3

D#3

F#3

G3
G#3
A3
B3
C4

A#3

C#4

D4
E4
F4

D#4

F#4

G4
G#4
A4
B4
C5

A#4

C#5

D5
E5
F5

D#5

F#5

G5
G#5
A5
B5
C6

A#5

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

120

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Note#

Note

C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G

-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Off

Group

3
3

4
4

O
O
O

1
1
1

O
O
O

2
2

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

1
127/000/001

18
126/000/125

Standard Kit 1

Chinese Kit

Da Cha
Da Gu mp
Da Gu rim
Da Gu f
Da Gu hand
Da Gu roll
Pai Gu 4
Pai Gu 4 High
Pai Gu 3
Pai Gu 3 High
Pai Gu 2
Pai Gu 2 High
Pai Gu 1
Luo High 1
Gong batter
Jin Luo
Luo High 2
Luo Mid-Low
Luo
Jin Luo Low
Da Cha
Da Cha effect
Zhong Cha
Xiao Cha effect
Xiao Cha
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
Qing
Finger Bell
Luo big
Mu Yu Low
Mu Yu Mid-Low
Mu Yu Mid
Mu Yu High
Nan Bang Zi roll
Nan Bang Zi
Ban Gu
Ban
Ban Gu roll
Chinese Opera Voice 1
Chinese Opera Voice 2
Chinese Opera Voice 3
Yun Luo F4
Yun Luo F#4
Yun Luo G4
Yun Luo G#4
Yun Luo A4
Yun Luo A#4
Yun Luo B4
Yun Luo C5
Yun Luo C#5
Yun Luo D5
Yun Luo D#5
Yun Luo E5
Yun Luo F5
Yun Luo F#5
Yun Luo G5
Yun Luo G#5
Yun Luo A5
Yun Luo A#5
Yun Luo B5
Yun Luo C6

19
127/000/127
Alternate
Alternate
Group Chinese Mix Kit Group

28
126/000/001

29
126/000/002

30
126/000/112

SFX Kit 1

SFX Kit 2

Animal Kit

2
2
2
2

Cutting Noise
Phone Call
Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak
Door Slam
String Slap
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Wind Chime
Telephone Ring 2

5
5
5
1
1

Rooster
Elephant
Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine

3
3
4
4
4

Dagu Mute
Zhongcha Mute
Dagu Heavy
Zhongcha Open
Paigu Middle
Paigu Low
Xiaocha Mute
Bangu
Xiaocha Open
Bangzi
Muyu Low
Zhongluo Mute
Muyu Mid-Low
Zhongluo Open
Muyu Middle
Xiaoluo Open
Muyu Mid-High
Muyu High

4
5
4
5

Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed

Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heartbeat
Footeps

Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet 2

Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework

7
7

Ghost
Maou

Horse
Cricket
Cow
Tiger
Rattlesnake
Monkeies
Crow

Style List
Style
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Style No.
Style Name
(Category)
Pop&Rock
1
FunkPopRock
2
AcousticRock
3
Cool8Beat
4
60’sRock1
5
60’sRock2
6
VintageGtrPop
7
60’sGuitarPop
8
70’s8Beat
9
90’sGuitarPop
10
KoolShuffle
11
BubblegumPop
12
BritPopSwing
13
JazzPop
14
HardRock
15
RootRock
16
RockShuffle
17
Unplugged
Ballad
1
8BeatAdria
2
OrganBallad
3
PianoBallad
4
8BeatBallad
5
EPBallad
6
6-8Modern
7
Chillout1
8
NewR&BBallad
9
16BeatBallad
10
PowerBallad
11
EasyBallad
Dance
1
ModChartPop
2
RetroClub
3
USChartHit
4
ClubBeat
5
Electronica
6
FunkyHouse
7
ChartR&B
8
MellowHipHop
9
SoulR&B
10
Chillout2
11
Ibiza
12
TechnoParty
13
DiscoHouse
14
DiscoPhilly
15
70’sDisco
16
80’sDisco
17
DreamDance
18
House
19
FrenchHouse
20
Garage
21
ClassicHipHop
22
NewHipHop
23
HipHopGroove
24
LatinDJ’s
Swing&Jazz
1
OrchBigBand
2
OrchestraSwing1
3
OrchestraSwing2
4
BigBandFast
5
BigBandShuffle
6
MidnightSwing
7
JumpJive

Style
No.
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118

Style No.
Style Name
(Category)
8
OrganGroove
9
JazzClub
10
Five-Four
11
JazzWaltzFast
12
Dixieland
13
Ragtime
14
Charleston
R&B
1
BluesRock
2
BluesBallad
3
Soul
4
FranklySoul
5
6-8Soul
6
SoulBrothers
7
OldiesR&R
8
60’sRock&Roll
9
Rock&Roll
10
Twist
11
GospelSisters
12
WorshipMed
13
DetroitPop
14
ModernR&B
15
ComboBoogie
Country
1
NewCountry
2
CountryHits
3
CountryBallad
4
CountryPop
5
CountryShuffle
6
Country2-4
7
FingerPickin
8
Bluegrass
9
Hoedown
10
CountryWaltz
Latin
1
BrazilianSamba
2
BossaNova
3
FastBossa
4
Pop Bossa
5
Forro
6
Beguine
7
Mambo
8
Salsa
9
Calypso
10
Merengue
11
Bachata
12
CubanSon
13
RumbaIsland
14
RumbaFlamenca
15
HappyReggae
16
LatinDisco
17
Joropo
18
Parranda
19
Reggaeton
Ballroom
1
VienneseWaltz
2
EnglishWaltz
3
Slowfox
4
Foxtrot
5
Quickstep
6
Tango
7
Swingfox
8
Pasodoble

Style
No.
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176

Style No.
Style Name
(Category)
9
Samba
10
ChaChaCha
11
Rumba
12
Jive
13
OrganSwing
14
OrganSamba
15
OrganQuickstep
16
9-8Waltz
17
TraditionalWaltz
Movie&Show
1
70’sTVTheme
2
Sci-fiMarch
3
WildWest
4
SaturdayNight
5
Showtune
6
Moonlight6-8
7
ClassicPianoBld
8
BaroqueAir
9
OrchestralBolero
10
OrchestralMarch
11
ChristmasSwing
12
ChristmasWaltz
Entertainer
1
DiscoFox
2
DiscoHands
3
AlpBallad
4
ScandSlowRock
5
ScandShuffle
6
70’sFrenchHit
7
SchlagerPop
8
SchlagerBeat
9
SchlagerPolka
10
PolkaPop
11
Tijuana
12
Carnival
13
PubPiano
World
1
IrishDance
2
SpanishPaso
3
FrenchMusette
4
Sirtaki
5
PopFlamenco
6
Reel
7
Jig
8
Tarantella
9
OberPolka
10
OberWaltzer
11
GermanMarch
12
USMarch
13
6-8March
14
Duranguense
15
CumbiaGrupera
16
Saeidy
17
WehdaSaghira
18
Laff
19
ArabicEuro
20
OrientalPop
21
Bhajan
22
Bhangra
23
Xi Qing Luo Gu
24
Jing Ju Jie Zou

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

121

Music Database List
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

122

MDB Name
All Time Hits
A Bridge To Cross Troubled Water
All Of My Loving
All OK Now
A Song For New England
Blowing In The Folk
Boots For Walking
Call Me When You Rock
Don’t Be Bad To Me
Get Back To Where You Belong
Guitar Wheels
Heaven? Nobody Gets Too Much
I Was Born Smiling
I Watch My Tears Go By
Leave Me Tender, Love Me True
Let Me Hold Your Hand
Letters Of Love
Living In A Colored Submarine
Love? Don’t Throw It Away
Makin’ It Thru The Night
Mrs. Robin’s Son
My Heart Is Very Simple
My Lover’s A Dream
My Shell Swing
Party? Oh, Blah Di!
Please Do Love Me In Liverpool
Riding Ticket
These Ones Are Young
This Game Makes You Cry
This Night Has Been A Hard Day!
Till The Moon Deserts The Sky
Woods Of Norway
You’re Just OK!
You’re So Young At Heart
Modern Pop
A Cosy Life In Italy
All Get Up
Angles of Charlie
A Sunshine Walk
Bossa Woman
Cross The Mersey By Ferry
Dream Of A Lover
Everything’s Changed
I’m Torn
It Is Always Raining On Me
It’s Only Words
It’s Simply Love
Life Groove
Life’s Walk
Love Goes This Way
Not Full Time Love
Our Current Love
Rollercoaster Through Life
Seriously Dippy
She’s One For Me
Shining Light For Love
Sorry May Be Hard To Say
Stars To Reach For
Sure Of That?
Swinging Sultan
Tell Her Your Feelings
The Girl Belongs To Me
This Affair’s In The Family
This Thing’s Called Love
Time Riding
What’s Taken So Long?
You Only Need Love
Sing Alongs
Danny’s Boy
Dear, My Clementine
Deep In Texas’s Heart
Ease Up Mother Brown
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

No.
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138

MDB Name
Espana Viva
Good Night For The Ladies
Here Are Happy Days Again
High Old Silver Lining
My Dad’s A Dustman
My Man Is Old
My Sunshine Is You
Old Smokey
Smiling Irish Eyes
Song For Susanna
Song Of The Sideboard
This Iron Is Old!
Tipperary’s A Long Way
Easy Listening
Balloon Bossa
I’m Gonna Leave Durham
La Mer Is Swinging
Making It Through The Rain
Morning’s New World
Mother!
Portugal In April
Raindrops On My Head
The Wind And Me
This Is Something Silly!
Whistling A Last Goodbye
Pop Classics
All On My Own
Are You Standing Still?
Boxing Song
Broken Heart
Complete Eclipse
Don’t Break My Heart Beat
Drifting On Broadway
Easier To Say It Than Do It
Girl Belonging To Bobby
Girl With Brown Eyes
Give Thanks For Music
Heartache Beat
Holiday In Summer Season
I’m Your Venus
It’s Really Not Usual In Wales
John B’s Sloop
Lane Of Pennies
Loves You She Does
My Religion Is Mislaid
Paradise Can’t Be As Nice
Portatone Man?
Raindrop Walk
Rocking My Life
Sally’s Got A Mustang
Shape Me And Bend Me
Sky Spirits
Somebody Needs Someone Else
Spin The Wheel
Suzie Wake Up
Sweden Takes A Chance
Sweet Lord Song
This Afternoon’s Sunny
This Day’s Just Perfect
This Is My Party
To Love Some Reggae
Tulsa Is 24 Hours Away
We Are Together And Happy
With My Friends To Help Me
You Can Help Yourself
Pop Ballads
Don’t Let The Sun Set For Me
Heavenly Creatures With Halo
It’s Crazy How I Miss You
Missing You Like Crazy
No Matter What The Boys Do Tell
What Is One More Year?

No.
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207

MDB Name
Where Are You Going To?
Ballad
At Once Ballad
Ballad For A Hero
Ballad For A Woman
Candle On The Piano
Don’t Leave Me Now
Do You Know Me Yet
Eyes Of Blue
Friends Are For Singing
Hard To Say Sorry
Hello, Do You Hear Me Playing?
I Can’t Live Without You
I Will Be There For You
I’ll Make Soul With You
I Love You In French
I’m Saving It All For You!
I Will Fly Away One Day
London Streets
Love’s Glory
Love’s Vision
Nothing Will Change My Love
One Time When We Touch
San Francisco Heart
Soft Songs Are Killing Me!
Take It Back For Good
The World Is What We Are
Up? It’s Where We Belong
You Are Inspiring
You Lift My Wings
Your True Color
Rock
69 Summers Long
Alabama’s Sweet Home
Born To Be Mild
Can’t Get Satisfied
Can We Stick Together
Dave On The Road
Don’t Think About Tomorrow
Dusting The Wind
Go For A Spin
Is The Heat On?
I Want You To Want Rock
Jumping Rock
Just Give Me Love And Rock
Last Countdown
Nobody Else Is A Champion
This Woman Plays Honky Tonk
Tiger’s Eye
Velvet Is Black
Wanting To Break Free
Whatever You Rock
Your Kindness Is Magic
Rock&Roll
All Shaken Up
Beethoven’s Rocking
Crazy Little Love Thing
Don’t Hurry Love
Good Looking Charm
Good Molly, Miss Golly
Great Fire Balls
I’m A Wanderer
I Won’t Be Cruel
Julie Does The Twist
Let’s Play The Twist
Let’s Sue Peggy
Particularly No Place To Go
Rock & Roll Jail
Rocking Blue Shoes
Rocking For 24 Hours
Shouting Twist
Teddy Is A Bear

Music Database List

No.
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276

MDB Name
The Music Is Rock&Roll
What A Day That Will Be
You Got Me Going, Really!
Oldies
All I Need Is The Air
Are You Sorry Now?
Breaking Up Isn’t Easy To Do
Diana’s Twist
Final Waltz
Girl From Uptown
Going Down Town
Golden Silence
Guitar For An Apache
Have I Got It?
Heaven Has Three Steps
He Kissed Crystal!
Hey, Let’s Rock Tonight!
I’m A Pola!
Magic Puff
Marina’s Song
Mend A Chino
Motion Of Poetry
My Pillow Has Tears On
Pete Retite
Please Be Mine, Baby
Star Of Movie
Teenie Bikini
The Ghetto Is In Me
The Lovin’ Feeling Has Gone
These Lips Are Lucky
This Doll’s Alive!
This Land Is Wonderful!
This Woman’s Pretty!
Tomorrow Will You Love Me
Tonight Do You Feel Lonesome
Twisting Again
Walking Right Back
We Don’t Want Milk Today
Words Aren’t Easy
You & You Alone
Organist
Bamba Party
Cat Groove
El Ranchero
Face Of A Child
Form
Guagli On Organ
Guide Me To My Home
It’s Dolly, Say Hello!
Nowhere It Came Out Of
Ribbon Of Yellow
Samba Cavaquinho
Samba Delicado
Side By Side In The Barn
Steam Train Samba
Tico Samba
Two Times Yeh!
Whispering Organ
White And Pale
Dance Floor
Adagio From Ibiza
Baa Bee Girl
Baby I Love Loving You
Buy Me Bailame, Please
Catch 22
Children In Trance?
Girl
High In The Sky
It’s So Horny
Janeiro Samba
Life Is High
London, R U Prepared?

No.
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345

MDB Name
Love First Time I Saw You
My Eyes Can’t Take Off!
No Dinero, No Tengo
Once More
Rose From The Desert
She Believes In Life After Love
Tambor DJ
This Song Is Something!
Up Is The Way To Move
Disco
A Day’s Difference
Babylon Rivers
Born Alive Disco
Brown Girl At The Disco
Cool Daddy Disco
Dee Eye Ess See Oh!
Disco Hustle
Don’t Misunderstand Me
Do You Love To Love?
Fever At Night
Go Where The Music Takes You
I Love That Boat!
It Really Is A Funky Town
I’ve Never Known Love LikeIt
Keepin’ Alive
Khan Disco
Local New Yorker
Make My Fire Burn Again
Mother Is Baking
Never Give Up On You
Philadelphia Sound
Russia’s Mad Priest
Searching For Freedom
Swedish Queen
Theme Of Love
Train Of Love
Wear It Out? Or Use It Up?
Why Am See A?
You’re Everything For Me
Swing
Big Kiss For Dream Building
Blue Roses For The Lady
Call The Whole Thing Off
Charles On
Get Out Of Bed
Goodbye To Blues Swing
High Hope Swing
Joy I Love Her So
Just Chickens Here!
My Shadow And Me
Not Forgettable
Not Misbehaving
Out Of Your Kick
Rag Band Time For Alex?
Ragtime Tiger
Safari Swing
Smiling Swing
Steam Train Boogie
Swing Yourself Up
Tap Dancing Bo
Thank You In Germany
The Importance Of Roses
The Sandman Gives Me A Dream
Two Foot Five
Yes Sir, My Baby Can Swing
You’re My Coffee’s Cream
Jazz
I Have All That Rhythm
My Home Is Pasadena
Not Decided
That Indigo Feeling
These Winners Are Easy

No.
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413

MDB Name
Wild Cat Dixie
BigBand
Big Band Patrol
If Only I Could Chime
Jiving Wailing And Jumping
Leroy Is Bad. Very Bad
L Is For The Way You Look At Me
Please Fly And Swing With Me
So What Is Not Old?
Tasty Honey
This Lady? She’s A Tramp
Wintry Wind Blowing
R&B/Gospel
Admire
As Played On Portatone
Baby Groove
Boys At The End Of The Road
Don’t Change Your Mind Baby
Don’t Get Excited!
It’s Soul, Man!
Knocking Wood
Loco Twist
On The Rivers Side
Sir Duke Is Wondering
Unchained Heart
When Man Loves Someone
Will I See You Again
Wish I Could Groove
You Should Think Frankly
Country
A Boy From The Country
Back On The Road
Blue Grass Bonanza
Forever In My Mind
Hi, Mary
Home On Country Highways
I Only Ever Need You
Lucille Left Me
Road Of The King
Special Orange
This Song Is Crazy!
Waltz In Tennessee
Latin
At Daylight The Bananaboat Comes
At The Copa
Bossa Gets The Blame
Bossa In Blue
Cherry And Apple - Colored
Corazon un Tengo
Don’t Worry, Reggae!
Eyes From Spain
Farewell To Jamaica
Flea From Spain
Frenetic Beguine
Guitar For Volare
Have You Been In Guantanamera
I Can’t Bear More Than This
Italian Mambo
It Is A Band, Aah!
Jamaican Sun
Just A Little Spanish City
Lots Of Besame
Love’s Amor In Latin
Luminous
Mambo Jamming
Mentiroso Es
My Sweet Calypso Girl
Not Less
Only One Note Makes A Samba
Pasodoble Cani
Patricia Is Dancing The Cha Cha
Rumba For Volare
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

123

Music Database List

No.
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477

124

MDB Name
Rushing Fools
Say No More In Brazil
Start The Beguine
Swaying Rumba
Taxi In Tijuana
Thirty Second Bossa
Three Times Perhaps
Vida De Los Caminos
Latin Pop
Dance In The Morning
You’re Mine Baby
Ballroom
Cumparsita Tango
He’s Got To Go
Moon Waltz
Old St. Bernards
On Sunday? I Never Will!
Perfidious One
Quando Samba
Say Magnifique!
This House Is Not Young
Yellow Bird Rumba
Christmas
Christmas Jingle
It’s The Most Wonderful Time
Rednosed Rudolph
Silent Christmas
This Boy Child Is Mary’s
Waltz At Christmas
Classical
Cannot Remember My Dreams
Classical Maria
Dream Of Love
Gladiators Entry
Skaters Dance
Sonata In The Moonlight
Song In The Key Of F
Spring Voices
Strings In The Air
The March Of Radetzky
Tristesse Third Etude
Waltz Of The Fledermaus
Family
Califragidocilistic? It’s Super!
Necessary Bear
Noisy Old Car?
Instrumentals
Acapulco Swings In The 20s
Adagio Chillout
Birds Played At Night
Concerto Of Love
Dancing Musicbox
Infant’s Pavane Chillout
Invitation To The Shak
Jerry’s Binx
Lonely Piper
Maple Ragtime
Paris Has Many Poor People
Petite Clarinet
Piece Of Funk
Rumba For Elena
String Holiday
Waltz Around The World
Yak This Sax
Party Time
Aga Doo
Big Samba Bamboo
Blankenesenolop
Dancing Bird
Going With A Good Thing
Hands Up Party
PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

No.
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545

MDB Name
I Love To Drink Cider
Kreuzberg
Louie’s My Brother
Mexican Trumpet
Mr. Schmidtchen
No Beer on Hawaii
Russ’ Ozone Party
Song Of The Chicken
The Bucklehuck
Schlager
Autobahnpolka
Blind Passenger
Capri Beat
Deep Love
Glaube An Wunder
Goodbye Amor
I Have Sad Love
In Ewigkeit
Italian Guy
Mexican Fiesta
Moscow City
No Tears
Oh Maria
Paloma Pop
Spanish Island
The Little House
Where Can I Find Love?
Wonderful Blonde
Worship
Forever Singing Your Love
I Am Everything
Lord Is Great
Love Cannot Be Greater
Our God Is Mighty
Rain Down Holy Spirit
With My Total Heart
Screen Theme
Ark Raiders March
A Spy Does It Better
Bank Robbers Ballad
Best On The Bill
Bills Barnacles
Dart Playing TV Theme
Daughters And Sons
Don’t Be A Muppet!
Do You Think England’s Done?
Farm Based Soap Theme
Fighting Stars
Flash Disco
Holiday Camp Rock
It’s A Big Country
June & Terry’s Theme
Lovin’ Summer
Magnificent Flying Men
Main For Rain
Mi-Re-Do
My Prince Will Come One Day
Only Friends But Good Ones
Paradise Conquest
Seven Magnificent Cowboys
Song Of The Trolley
The Fantastic Getaway
These Are My Favorites!
Tie, Tails, And A Hat
Twelve O’Clock Theme
You’re The Only One I Want
Showtime
A Nickel In The Nickelodeon
Dance Lord
Dance Of Fire
Entertainment That Is
It’s Only A Day Away!

No.
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600

MDB Name
It’s Time For Cabaret!
I Wished I Danced All Night
No Business Like It!
Parade At Easter
The Cat’s Memory
The Greatest Times
The Roses Are Coming Up
The Sun Sets, The Sun Rises
Tonight At The Westside
Traditional
Abide This Hymn
Ave Maria No More
Can Can Orpheus?
Fun In the Forest
Moulin Heart
Texas Yellow Rose
March & Polka
Marching RAF
Rosa
That Polka Is Happy!
Vienna Forever
Waltz
Amsterdam’s Favorite Flowers
Amsterdam’s Old Windmill
Charmaine’s Waltz
Daisy’s Bicycle
Fascination Waltz
I’m Trying To Remember
Is It True Love?
Lover Waltz
Samson’s Girl
Snow Waltz
The Little Pub
Waltzing To Whatever Will Be
Waltz In Raggy Time
Waltz Of Amore
Waltz Of The Cuckoo
Waltz Of The Emperor
Waltz To Skate In Wintertime
World
Alabina Orient
Close Your Face
Die Sabber josija
Goodbye Roma
I Land On The Sun
La Ballade De Gerard
La Cucarumba
La Maison Viens
La Puntualidad
Latin Cuccuru
Musette De Reine
Oh Beautiful Italian Sun
Only Say Hello
Populaire Chanson
Santa Lou Cheer
Shenandoah’s Far Away
The Classy Trumpeter
Van Maas Land
Ya Salama

Voice Effect Type List
● Harmony Types
No.

Harmony Type

01(Standard Duet)

02(Standard Trio)

03(Full Chord)

04(Rock Duet)

05(Country Duet)

06(Country Trio)

07(Block)

08(4-Way Close 1)

09(4-Way Close 2)

10(4-Way Open)

11(1+5)

12(Octave)

13(Strum)

14(Multi Assign)

15(Echo 1/4)

16(Echo 1/6)

17(Echo 1/8)

18(Echo 1/12)

19(Tremolo 1/8)

20(Tremolo 1/12)

21(Tremolo 1/16)

22(Tremolo 1/32)

23(Trill 1/12)

24(Trill 1/16)

25(Trill 1/24)

26(Trill 1/32)

Description
Harmony types 01–14 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto
accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing
songs that contain chord data.

Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with
the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not;
however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 72). The individual
note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings
are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note
triplets.
• The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played.
• The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four).
• The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

125

Voice Effect Type List

● Reverb Types
No.
1

Type

Description

HALL1

MSB

LSB

0
16

HALL2

HALL3

HALL4

HALL5

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.

HALL M

HALL L

BASIC HALL

LARGE HALL

ATMO HALL

ROOM1

ROOM2

ROOM3

ROOM4

ROOM5

ROOM6

ROOM7

ROOM S

ROOM M

ROOM L

ACOSTIC ROOM

DRUMS ROOM

PERC ROOM

STAGE1

STAGE2

STAGE3

STAGE4

PLATE1

PLATE2

PLATE3

GM PLATE

TUNNEL

Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right.

CANYON

A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit.

BASEMENT

A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.

WHITE ROOM

A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.

NO EFFECT

No effect.

126

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.

Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.

Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.

Voice Effect Type List

● Chorus Types
No.

MSB

LSB

CHORUS1

Type

Description

CHORUS2

CHORUS3

CHORUS4

CHORUS5

CHORUS6

CHORUS7

CHORUS8

CHORUS FAST

CHORUS LITE

GM CHORUS1

GM CHORUS2

GM CHORUS3

GM CHORUS4

FB CHORUS

CELESTE1

CELESTE2

SYMPHONIC1

SYMPHONIC2

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.

FLANGER1

FLANGER2

FLANGER3

FLANGER4

FLANGER5

GM FLANGER

Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

ROTARY SP1

ROTARY SP2

ROTARY SP3

ROTARY SP4

ROTARY SP5

ROTARY SP6

ROTARY SP7

2WAY ROT SP

AUTO PAN1

AUTO PAN2

EP AUTOPAN

T_AUTO PAN1

Simulates a rotary speaker.

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

Tempo synchronized Auto PAN.

121

TREMOLO1

TREMOLO2

TREMOLO3

EP TREMOLO

GT TREMOLO1

GT TREMOLO2

T_TREMOLO

120

NO EFFECT

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

No effect.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

127

Voice Effect Type List

● DSP Types
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

Type
HALL1
HALL2
HALL3
HALL4
HALL5
HALL M
HALL L
BASIC HALL
LARGE HALL
ATMO HALL
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
ROOM4
ROOM5
ROOM6
ROOM7
ROOM S
ROOM M
ROOM L
ACOSTIC ROOM
DRUMS ROOM
PERC ROOM
STAGE1
STAGE2
STAGE3
STAGE4
PLATE1
PLATE2
PLATE3
GM PLATE
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT
WHITE ROOM
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
CHORUS4
CHORUS5
CHORUS6
CHORUS7
CHORUS8
CHORUS FAST
CHORUS LITE
GM CHORUS1
GM CHORUS2
GM CHORUS3
GM CHORUS4
FB CHORUS
CELESTE1
CELESTE2
SYMPHONIC1
SYMPHONIC2
ENS DETUNE1
ENS DETUNE2
KARAOKE1
KARAOKE2
KARAOKE3
ER1
ER2
GATE REVERB
REVERS GATE

EQ DISCO

EQ TEL

2BAND EQ

128

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Description

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.

Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.

Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.
Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right.
A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit.
A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.
A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.
Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.
Echo for karaoke.
This effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb.
Simulation of gated reverb.
Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse.
Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco
music.
Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard
through a telephone receiver.
Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies.

MSB
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
17
18
19
16
66
66
66
66
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
66
66
68
68
87
87
20
20
20
9
9
10
11

LSB
0
16
17
18
1
6
7
30
31
23
16
17
18
19
0
1
2
5
6
7
20
21
22
16
17
0
1
16
17
0
7
0
0
0
0
17
8
16
1
2
0
1
8
16
17
3
4
5
6
7
0
2
16
0
0
16
0
1
2
0
1
0
0

Voice Effect Type List

No.
67

Type
3BAND EQ

ST 3BAND EQ

69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134

HM ENHANCE1
HM ENHANCE2
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
FLANGER4
FLANGER5
GM FLANGER
V_FLANGER
TEMPO FLANGER
DELAY LCR1
DELAY LCR2
DELAY LR
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
TEMPO DELAY
TEMPO ECHO
TEMPO CROSS
V_DST ROCA
V_DST FUSION
V_DST CRUNC
V_DST VINTAG
V_DST HARD2
V_DST HEAVY
V_DST HARD1
V_DST SOFT
DIST HARD1
DIST HARD2
DIST SOFT1
DIST SOFT2
DIST HEAVY
OVERDRIVE1
OVERDRIVE2
ST DIST
ST OD
ST DIST HARD
ST DIST SOFT
AMP SIM1
AMP SIM2
ST AMP1
ST AMP2
ST AMP3
ST AMP4
ST AMP5
ST AMP6
DST+DELAY1
DST+DELAY2
OD+DELAY1
OD+DELAY2
CMP+DST+DLY1
CMP+DST+DLY2
CMP+OD+DLY1
CMP+OD+DLY2
V_DST H+DLY
V_DST S+DLY
DST+TDLY
OD+TDLY
COMP+DIST1
COMP+DIST2
CMP+DST+TDLY
CMP+OD+TDLY1
CMP+OD+TDLY2
CMP+OD+TDLY3
CMP+OD+TDLY4
CMP+OD+TDLY5
CMP+OD+TDLY6

Description
Mono EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies.
Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies.
Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out.

Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

Flanger which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds.
Tempo synchronized flanger.
Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center).
Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are provided.
Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for L and R.
The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed.
Tempo synchronized delay.
Tempo synchronized delay.
Tempo synchronized L&R delay.

Vintage Distortion.

Hard-edge distortion.
Soft, warm distortion.
Heavy distortion.
Adds mild distortion to the sound.
Stereo distortion.
Stereo Overdrive.
Hard-edge stereo distortion.
Soft, warm soft distortion.
A simulation of a guitar amp.

Stereo amp simulator.

Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.
Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.
V Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.
Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.
Compressor and Distotion are connected in series.
Compressor, Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

MSB

LSB

81
81
67
67
67
67
67
67
104
107
5
5
6
7
8
21
21
22
103
103
98
98
98
98
98
98
75
75
75
75
73
74
74
73
74
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
95
95
95
95
96
96
96
96
98
98
100
100
73
73
101
101
101
101
101
101
101

16
0
8
16
17
1
0
7
0
0
16
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
18
19
28
29
30
31
0
2
16
22
17
23
0
0
9
8
8
18
19
0
1
20
21
8
24
25
26
16
0
17
1
16
0
17
1
1
3
0
1
16
1
0
1
16
17
18
19
20

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

129

Voice Effect Type List

No.
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143

Type
V_DST H+TDL1
V_DST H+TDL2
V_DST S+TDL1
V_DST S+TDL2
COMP MED
COMP HEAVY
COMP MELODY
COMP BASS
MBAND COMP

144

COMPRESSOR

145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203

NOISE GATE
VCE CANCEL
AMBIENCE
TALKING MOD
ISOLATOR
PHASER1
PHASER2
PHASER3
T_PHASER1
T_PHASER2
EP PHASER1
EP PHASER2
EP PHASER3
PITCH CHG1
PITCH CHG2
PITCH CHG3
DUAL ROT BRT
D ROT BRT F
DUAL ROT WRM
D ROT WRM F
DUAL ROT SP1
DUAL ROT SP2
ROTARY SP1
ROTARY SP2
ROT SP2 FAST
ROTARY SP3
ROT SP3 FAST
ROTARY SP4
ROT SP4 FAST
ROTARY SP5
ROT SP5 FAST
ROTARY SP6
ROTARY SP7
ROT SP7 FAST
ROTARY SP8
ROT SP8 FAST
ROTARY SP9
ROT SP9 FAST
2WAY ROT SP
DST+ROT SP
DST+2ROT SP
OD+ROT SP
OD+2ROT SP
AMP+ROT SP
AMP+2ROT SP
AUTO PAN1
AUTO PAN2
AUTO PAN3
EP AUTOPAN
T_AUTO PAN1
T_AUTO PAN2
TREMOLO1
TREMOLO2
TREMOLO3
EP TREMOLO
GT TREMOLO1
GT TREMOLO2
VIBE VIBRATE
T_TREMOLO

130

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Description
V Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack
can also be added to the sound.
This effect independently compresses the level of certain frequency bands in the sound.
Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack
can also be added to the sound.
Gates the audio signal when the audio signal falls below a specified level.
Attenuates the audio in the center position.
Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width.
Adds a vowel sound to the input signal.
Attenuates the level of audio signals only at mid-range frequencies.

Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound.

Changes the pitch of the input signal.

Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching.

Simulates a rotary speaker.

Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series.
Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.
Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series.
Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.
Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series.
Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.
Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

Tempo synchronized pan.

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

Vibraphone effect.
Tempo synchronized tremolo.

MSB
103
103
103
103
83
83
105
105
105

LSB
0
17
1
16
16
17
16
17
0

84
85
88
93
115
72
72
72
108
108
72
72
72
80
80
80
99
99
99
99
99
99
69
71
71
71
71
70
70
66
66
69
71
71
69
69
69
69
86
69
86
69
86
69
86
71
71
71
71
121
121
70
71
70
70
71
70
119
120

0
0
0
0
0
0
8
19
0
16
17
18
16
16
0
1
16
30
17
31
0
1
16
17
23
18
24
17
20
18
19
0
22
25
17
18
19
20
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
16
0
1
21
0
1
16
19
0
18
20
19
0
0

Voice Effect Type List

No.
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239

Type
AUTO WAH1
AUTO WAH2
AT WAH+DST1
AT WAH+DST2
AT WAH+OD1
AT WAH+OD2
TEMPO AT WAH
TOUCH WAH1
TOUCH WAH2
TOUCH WAH3
TC WAH+DST1
TC WAH+DST2
TC WAH+OD1
TC WAH+OD2
WH+DST+DLY1
WH+DST+DLY2
WH+DST+TDLY
WH+OD+DLY1
WH+OD+DLY2
WH+OD+TDLY1
WH+OD+TDLY2
CLVI TC WAH1
CLVI TC WAH2
EP TC WAH1
EP TC WAH2
PEDAL WAH
PEDAL WH+DST
P.WH+DIST HD
P.WH+DIST HV
P.WH+DIST LT
PEDAL WH+OD
P.WH+OD HD
P.WH+OD HV
P.WH+OD LT
NO EFFECT
THRU

Description
Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter.
The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion.
The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.
Tempo synchronized auto wah.
Changes the center frequency of a wah filter according to the input level.
The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion.
The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.
Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
WAH, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.
Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.
WAH, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.
Clavinet Touch Wah.
EP Touch Wah.
Pedal position changes the center frequency of the wah filter.
Distortion applied to the pedal wah output.

Overdrive (distortion) applied to the pedal wah output.
No effect.
Bypass without applying an effect.

MSB
78
78
78
78
78
78
79
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
97
97
102
97
97
102
102
82
82
82
82
122
122
122
122
122
122
122
122
122
0
64

LSB
16
0
17
1
18
2
0
0
8
20
16
1
17
2
16
0
0
17
1
1
16
18
28
19
29
0
1
21
23
25
2
22
24
26
0
0

• Effect types cannot be adjusted, except for the following:
Reverb level, Chorus level, DSP level on page 81
(For example, delay time cannot be changed in DELAY LCR1).
• The actual effect may not be audible depending on the particular Voice.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

131

132

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Mode

Key's
Ch's

After
Touch

Change

Control

0,32
1,5,7,10,11
6,38
64-67
71-74
84
91,93,94
96-97
98-99
100-101

Pitch Bend

Note ON
Note OFF

Velocity

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o

o 0-24 semi

x
x

o 9nH,v=1-127
x 9nH,v=0

0 - 127
: True voice **************

3
x
**************

Default
Messages
Altered

Note
Number

1 - 16
1 - 16

Default
Changed

Basic
Channel

Function...

Transmitted

Recognized

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

o 0-24 semi

x
o

o 9nH,v=1-127
x

0 - 127
0 - 127

3
x
x

1 - 16
1 - 16

YAMAHA
[ Digital Keyboard ]
Model PSR-S550 MIDI Implementation Chart

Sound Controller
Portament Cntrl
Effect Depth
RPN Inc,Dec
NRPN LSB,MSB
RPN LSB,MSB

Data Entry

Bank Select

Remarks

Date:11-APR-2008
Version:1.0

MIDI Implementation Chart

: True #

x
x
x
x
o
x

Aux

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

:All Sound OFF
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
Mes- :Active Sense
sages:Reset
Notes:

o
o

x
x
x

o(120,126,127)
o(121)
o(122)
o(123-125)
o
x

o
o

x
x
x

o 0 - 127

Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO

o 0 - 127
**************

System
: Clock
Real Time: Commands

Common

: Song Pos.
: Song Sel.
: Tune

System Exclusive

Prog
Change

o : Yes
x : No
MIDI Implementation Chart

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

133

MIDI Data Format
NOTE:
1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions
as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming
data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel
voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.
• MIDI Master Tuning
• System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type,
Chorus Type and DSP Type.
2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the
Harmony effect.
3 Exclusive
F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H
• This message automatically restores all default settings for
the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.
F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H
• This message allows the volume of all channels to be
changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).
• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values
for “ll” are ignored.)
F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 00H, 00H, 00H,
ddH, ddH, ddH, ddH, F7H
• This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of
all channels.
• The values of “dd” are used for XG Master Tuning.
• The default value of “dd” are 00H, 04H, 00H, 00H, respectively.

134

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,
llH, F7H
• mm : Reverb Type MSB
• ll : Reverb Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Type List (page 126) for details.
F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,
llH, F7H
• mm : Chorus Type MSB
• ll : Chorus Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Type List (page 127) for details.
F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH,
F7H
• mm: DSP Type MSB
• ll: DSP Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Type List (page 128) for details.
4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is
transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH
(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized.
5 Local ON/OFF
Bn, 7A, 7F
Bn, 7A, 00
Value for “n” is ignored.

Specifications
Keyboards
• 61 Standerd-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response.

Display
• 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)

Setup
• STANDBY/ON
• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX
• LCD CONTRAST

Panel Controls
• DEMO, SONG MODE
• SONG-PRESET, SONG-USER, SONG-SCORE, SONG-LYRICS, SONG-REC
• USB
• STYLE CATEGORY, VOICE CATEGORY
• TRANSPOSE [-] [+], METRONOME, TAP TEMPO, TEMPO [-]
[+]
• OTS LINK, AUTO FILL IN, ACMP, INTRO [1]–[3], MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D], ENDING/rit. [1]–[3] (REW) (FF), SYNC STOP
(A-B REPEAT), SYNC START (PAUSE), START/STOP
• REGIST/PART [MIXER], MEMORY, REGIST BANK [-] [+],
REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8], STYLE [1]–[8], SONG
[1/9]–[8/16], EXIT, CATEGORY [ < ] [ > ], Dial, [+/YES] [-/NO]
• EXECUTE, MDB, FILE MENU, FUNCTION, ONE TOUTCH
SETTING [1]–[4], LEFT, DUAL, HARMONY, TOUCH, SUSTAIN, DSP, UPPER OCTAVE [-] [+]

Realtime Control
• Pitch Bend Wheel

Voice
• 294 Voices + 12 Drum Kits + 10 SFX kits + 480 XG Voices
(Included 11 Regional Voices and 8 Regional Drum/Percussion
Kits)
• Polyphony: 64
• LEFT
• DUAL

Style
• 176
• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START,
START/STOP, INTRO [1]–[3], MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D], ENDING/rit. [1]–[3], AUTO FILL IN
• Style Creator
• Fingering:
Multi Finger, Full Keyboard
• Style Volume

Music Database
• 600

Registration Memory
• 8 banks x 8 memories
• Regist Clear

Mixer
• Volume, Pan, Reverb, Chorus

Function
• VOLUME:
• OVERALL:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Style Volume, Song Volume
Tuning, Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch
Sensitivity, Chord Fingering
MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level
DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level
LEFT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level
EFFECT:
Reverb Type, Chorus Type, DSP Type, Master
EQ Type
HARMONY:
Harmony Type, Harmony Volume
PC:
PC Mode
MIDI:
Local On/Off, External Clock, Keyboard Out,
Style Out, Song Out, Initial Setup
METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature
Denominator, Bell On/Off, Metronome Volume
SCORE:
Quantize, Right-Part, Left-Part
UTILITY:
Demo Cancel, TG Mode
LANGUAGE: Language

Effects
•
•
•
•

Harmony:
Reverb:
Chorus:
DSP:

26 types
35 types
44 types
237 types

Song
•
•
•
•

9 Preset Songs + User Songs + USB Memory
Song Clear, Track Clear
Song Volume
Song Control: A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP

Recording
• Song
User Song:
Recording Tracks:
• Style Creator

5 Songs
1–16, STYLE

MIDI
• Local On/Off
• Initial Setup
• External Clock
• Keyboard Out
• Style Out
• Song Out

Auxiliary jacks
• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 16V, USB TO HOST,
USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN

Amplifier
• 12W x 2

Speakers
• (12cm + 3cm) x 2

Power Consumption
• 25W

Power Supply
• Adaptor: PA-301, PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha

Dimensions (W x D x H)
• 946 x 402 x 130 mm (37-1/4" x 15-7/8" x 5-1/8")

Weight
• 7.5kg (16 lbs., 9 oz.)

Supplied Accessories
• Music Rest
• Accessory CD-ROM
• Owner’s Manual
• AC Power adaptor (May not be included depending on your particular area.)

Optional Accessories
• Headphones: HPE-150
• Keyboard Stand: L6
• Footswitch: FC4/FC5
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or
modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.
Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

135

Index
+/YES, -/NO button ...................... 14, 41
>/■ button.............................. 14, 28, 41
button ........................................ 14, 28
A B button................................. 14, 73
f button...................................... 14, 28
r button ..................................... 14, 28

Dual Voice DSP Level.........................81
Dual Voice Octave...............................81
Dual Voice Pan ....................................81
Dual Voice Reverb Level ....................81
Dual Voice Volume .............................81

E
A
A-B Repeat.......................................... 73
Accessories............................................ 7
ACMP button ................................ 14, 23
Auto Accompaniment Region............. 23
AUTO FILL IN button........................ 55
Auto Fill-in.......................................... 55

Effect Type List .................................125
Ending..................................................55
ENDING/rit. I–III buttons .............14, 55
EXECUTE button ..........................15, 84
EXIT button ...................................14, 42
External Clock .....................................94
External Song.......................................29

Backup................................................. 39
Backup Clear ....................................... 39
Backup data (Transfer)........................ 98
Bank .................................................... 77
Beat ..................................................... 50

FF .........................................................28
File Control ..........................................83
FILE MENU button .................15, 83–84
File Save (File Menu) ..........................85
Footswitch............................................10
Format (File Menu)..............................84
FullKeyboard .......................................63
FUNCTION button ........................15, 80
FUNCTION display.............................42
Function Settings ...........................80–82

C
Category ............................ 17, 22, 27, 40
Category < and > buttons ............ 15, 41
CD-ROM......................................... 7, 99
Chord................................. 23, 25, 61–62
Chord Fingering ............................ 25, 63
Chorus ................................................. 46
Chorus Type ...................................... 127
Clear (Song Track) .............................. 38
Clear (User Song)................................ 37
Computer........................... 91–92, 94, 96
Contrast ............................................... 12
CONTRAST knob......................... 12, 15

D
DC IN 16V jack ............................ 10, 15
Delete (File Menu) .............................. 88
DEMO button................................ 14, 16
Demo Cancel ....................................... 82
Demo Song.......................................... 16
Dial ................................................ 14, 41
Display ................................................ 42
Drum Kit ............................................. 21
Drum Kit List .................................... 116
DSP ..................................................... 47
DSP button .................................... 15, 47
DSP Type .......................................... 128
DUAL button ................................ 15, 18
Dual Voice .......................................... 18
Dual Voice Chorus level ..................... 81
Dual Voice Dry Level ......................... 81

136

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Left Voice Pan..................................... 81
Left Voice Reverb Level ..................... 81
Left Voice Volume.............................. 81
Load (File Menu)................................. 87
Loaded Song........................................ 29
Local.................................................... 94
Lyrics................................................... 31
LYRICS button.............................. 14, 31

Initial Send...........................................95
Initial Setup..........................................95
Initialization .........................................39
INTRO I–III buttons ......................14, 55

Main..................................................... 55
MAIN A–D buttons....................... 14, 55
MAIN Display..................................... 42
MAIN VARIATION (Style) ............... 55
Main Voice .......................................... 17
Main Voice Chorus Level ................... 81
Main Voice Dry Level......................... 81
Main Voice DSP Level........................ 81
Main Voice Octave.............................. 81
Main Voice Pan ................................... 81
Main Voice Reverb level..................... 81
Main Voice Volume ............................ 81
Master EQ Type .................................. 52
MASTER VOLUME control .. 11, 14, 40
MDB button................................... 15, 26
Measure ............................................... 36
MEMORY button.......................... 14, 77
MEMORY Clear ................................. 39
Message (LCD) ................................. 108
Metronome .......................................... 49
METRONOME button ............ 14, 49–50
Metronome Volume ............................ 50
MIDI.................................................... 94
MIDI Data Format............................. 134
MIDI Implementation Chart.............. 132
Multi Recording .................................. 34
Music Database ................................... 26
Music Database List .......................... 122
Music Rest........................................... 13
Mute..................................................... 74

Keyboard Out.......................................94

Octave.................................................. 54
One Touch Setting (OTS).................... 58
ONE TOUCH SETTING 1–4 buttons
................................................... 15, 58
Options .............................................. 135
OTS LINK button.......................... 14, 58

H
Harmony ..............................................44
HARMONY button........................15, 44
Harmony Type .............................44, 125
Harmony Volume ................................82
Headphones..........................................10

L
Language..............................................12
LEFT button...................................15, 19
Left Part ...............................................98
Left Voice ............................................19
Left Voice Chorus Level......................81
Left Voice Dry Level...........................81
Left Voice DSP Level..........................81
Left Voice Octave................................81

P
Part Assign .......................................... 35
PAUSE ................................................ 28
PC ........................................................ 95
PHONES/OUTPUT jack............... 10, 15

Index

Pitch Bend ........................................... 48
Pitch Bend Range ................................ 81
PITCH BEND wheel..................... 15, 48
Power Adaptor .................................... 10
PRESET button ............................. 14, 27
Preset Song.......................................... 29

SUSTAIN button ...........................15, 47
SUSTAIN jack...............................10, 15
SYNC START button..............14, 23, 56
SYNC STOP button.......................14, 57
Synchro Start........................................56
Synchro Stop........................................57

Quantize .............................................. 82
Quick Recording ................................. 33

Tap Start...............................................51
TAP TEMPO button ......................14, 51
Tempo ..................................................72
TEMPO +, - buttons ................14, 49, 72
Time Signature.....................................50
TOUCH button ..............................15, 51
Touch Sensitivity .................................51
Track ..............................................32, 74
Track Clear ..........................................38
Transfer..........................................96, 98
Transpose .............................................53
TRANSPOSE +, - buttons .............14, 53
Troubleshooting (Installation Guide).104
Troubleshooting (Instrument) ............107
Tuning..................................................53

R
REC button.................................... 14, 33
Record ................................................. 32
REGIST BANK +, - buttons ......... 14, 77
REGIST/PART [MIXER] button.. 14, 74
Registration Memory .......................... 77
REGISTRATION MEMORY
1–8 buttons ................................ 14, 77
Repeat (A-B Repeat) ........................... 73
Reverb ................................................. 45
Reverb Type ...................................... 126
REW .................................................... 28
Right Part ............................................ 98

U
S
Score.................................................... 30
SCORE button............................... 14, 30
Section................................................. 55
SMF (Standard MIDI File).................. 86
SMF Save ............................................ 86
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
....................................................... 105
Song............................................... 27–29
SONG category buttons ................ 14, 27
Song Clear ........................................... 37
Song Memory................................ 32, 35
SONG MODE button .................... 14, 27
Song Out.............................................. 94
Song Volume....................................... 72
Specifications .................................... 135
Split Point...................................... 19, 59
STANDBY/ON switch.................. 11, 14
START/STOP button .............. 14, 22, 41
Stop Accompaniment .......................... 60
Store (Registration) ............................. 77
Style............................................... 22, 55
STYLE category buttons............... 14, 22
Style File ............................................. 63
Style List ........................................... 121
Style Out.............................................. 94
Style Volume....................................... 60
SUSTAIN (Footswitch) ...................... 10
Sustain (Panel) .................................... 47

UPPER OCTAVE +, - buttons ......15, 54
USB......................................................90
USB button ....................................14, 27
USB MIDI Driver ......................101–102
USB Song ............................................29
USB TO DEVICE terminal .....15, 83, 90
USB TO HOST terminal..........15, 90, 92
USER (Song) button ......................14, 27
USER (Style) button ............................63
User File.........................................85, 87
User Song.......................................29, 32
User Style.............................................63

V
Voice....................................................17
VOICE category buttons................15, 17
Voice List...........................................110
Volume.................................................40

X
XG..........................................................6

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

137

138

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment
This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that
used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household
waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to
applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the
Directives 2002/96/EC.
By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and
prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which
could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact
your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer
or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items,
please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of
disposal.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

139

Limited Warranty
90 DAYS LABOR

1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed
below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models
included in the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF DIGITAL KEYBOARDS
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect
in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject
to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the
consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as
warranty replacements.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these
limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for
assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation
of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts
under warranty.
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has
a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and
to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to
failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an
authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia,
and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.
Model___________________________

Serial #________________________________

Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________
(Retailer)

Date______________________________________

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Electronic Service Division
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

140

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

ASIA

THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888

ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311

EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022

GREECE

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160

MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900

SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00

PHILIPPINES

DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00

Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

FINLAND

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374

F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511

TAIWAN

NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii
Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia
Tel: 495 626 0660
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317

OCEANIA

AFRICA

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THAILAND

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688

Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
EKB45

Yamaha Global Home
http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 for Macintosh
Create Date                     : 2008:06:20 10:13:18Z
Modify Date                     : 2011:04:12 17:58:29+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:04:12 17:58:29+09:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Document ID                     : uuid:1c68d9d6-71dd-40f4-b531-be873cdbe2bc
Instance ID                     : uuid:1fe963c0-6365-4e56-afaa-4f0f876787ea
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : PSR-S550 Owner's Manual
Creator                         : U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division, Yamaha Corporation
Description                     : psr-s550_en_om_c1.pdf
Subject                         : PSR-S550
Page Count                      : 142
Author                          : U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division, Yamaha Corporation
Keywords                        : PSR-S550

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha PSR S550 Owner's Manual Psrs550 En Om C1

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation